Bull NovaScale R460 User Guide

SA2500/WA2500
Bull NovaScale R460
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
User Guide „
„
„
„
„
„
„
86 A1 57FE 00
This page is deliberately left empty.
User Guide
www.bull.com
20
Proprietary Notice and Liability Disclaimer
The information disclosed in this document, including all designs and related materials,
is the valuable property of NEC Computers and/or its licensors. NEC Computers and/
or its licensors, as appropriate, reserve all patent, copyright and other proprietary rights
to this document, including all design, manufacturing, reproduction, use, and sales
rights thereto, except to the extent said rights are expressly granted to others.
To allow for design and specification improvements, the information in this document
is subject to change at any time, without notice. Reproduction of this document or
portions thereof without prior written approval of NEC Computers is prohibited.
The Bull product(s) discussed in this document are warranted in accordance with the
terms of the Warranty Statement accompanying each product. However, actual
performance of each product is dependent upon factors such as system configuration,
customer data, and operator control. Since implementation by customers of each
product may vary, the suitability of specific product configurations and applications
must be determined by the customer and is not warranted by Bull.
Trademarks
NEC ESMPRO, NEC DianaScope, NEC MWA, and ExpressBuilder are trademarks or
registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.
NovaScale is a registered trademark of Bull SAS.
Adobe, and Adobe Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
Microsoft, Microsoft Windows, Windows NT, Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows
2000 and Windows Server 2003 are all registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Intel and Xeon are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
All other product, brand, or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective trademark owners.
rev 2.0 January 2007
Copyright 2007
NEC Computers S.A.S.
All Rights Reserved
3
User Guide
www.bull.com
Table of Contents
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Safety Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
European Notice ............................................................................................................
USA and Canada Notice ................................................................................................
Modifications to the Product..........................................................................................
Connections and Remote Earths ....................................................................................
Power Supply and Cables ..............................................................................................
Batteries .........................................................................................................................
Chassis Cover Removal and Replacement ....................................................................
Laser Compliance Statement .........................................................................................
Warning - Hazardous Voltage! ......................................................................................
Warning -Avoid Electrostatic Discharge!......................................................................
Product Disposal ............................................................................................................
11
12
12
12
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
Using This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Care and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
High Performance .......................................................................................................... 19
Expandability ................................................................................................................. 19
Main Features ................................................................................................................ 19
System Chassis Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
External View ................................................................................................................
Front View with Front Bezel Closed .............................................................................
Front View with Front Bezel Removed.........................................................................
Rear View ......................................................................................................................
Internal View .................................................................................................................
20
21
22
24
26
System board Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Motherboard...................................................................................................................
ACPI ..............................................................................................................................
Onboard Remote Management Card (RMC).................................................................
Degradation Feature.......................................................................................................
Memory RAS Features ..................................................................................................
Remote Power-On Feature (Wake On LAN) ................................................................
AC-Link Feature ............................................................................................................
27
28
28
29
29
29
30
Standard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
System Security ............................................................................................................. 32
ExpressBuilder CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
With the ExpressBuilder CD you can:........................................................................... 33
Software End-User License Agreement ........................................................................ 33
Setting Up the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4
User Guide
www.bull.com
Setup Flow ..................................................................................................................... 34
Selecting Server Site...................................................................................................... 35
Unpacking the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Installing the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Restricted Access Location............................................................................................
ESD Precaution..............................................................................................................
Checking Components...................................................................................................
Required Tools...............................................................................................................
Installation Procedure for Rack .....................................................................................
Installing the Optional Cable Arm.................................................................................
Removing the Server from the Rack Assembly.............................................................
38
38
39
39
39
44
49
Making Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Connecting Peripheral Devices...................................................................................... 52
Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Turning On the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Installing Operating System........................................................................................... 60
Installing Utilities .......................................................................................................... 60
Making Backup Copies of System Information ............................................................ 60
Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Powering On Your System ............................................................................................
POST Execution Flow ...................................................................................................
Identification of Servers (UID Switch)..........................................................................
Powering Off the Server System ...................................................................................
Forcing a Power Shutdown............................................................................................
62
63
65
66
66
Configuring Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
BIOS Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using the BIOS Setup Utility ........................................................................................
BIOS Setup Configuration Settings...............................................................................
Main Menu.....................................................................................................................
Advanced Menu.............................................................................................................
Security Menu................................................................................................................
Server Menu...................................................................................................................
Boot Menu .....................................................................................................................
Exit Menu ......................................................................................................................
68
69
70
72
76
77
82
83
RAID Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Onboard RAID Features ................................................................................................
Installing the Hard Disk Drives .....................................................................................
Enabling the RAID Feature ...........................................................................................
Running LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility.........................................................
Operating Procedures for Setup Utility .........................................................................
Manual Rebuild..............................................................................................................
Setting Hot Spare ...........................................................................................................
Check Consistency.........................................................................................................
Others.............................................................................................................................
84
85
85
86
89
93
95
96
97
Configuring Motherboard Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Clearing CMOS or Password....................................................................................... 102
5
User Guide
www.bull.com
Upgrading Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
General Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Recommended for Upgrading Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing Your System for Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and Replacing the Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
103
103
105
105
105
106
Front Bezel................................................................................................................... 106
Drive Cover.................................................................................................................. 108
Logic Cover ................................................................................................................. 110
Upgrading Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Installation ................................................................................................................... 113
Removal ....................................................................................................................... 119
Installing or Removing Random Access Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Installation Order .........................................................................................................
Installation ...................................................................................................................
Removal .......................................................................................................................
Using the Memory RAS Features................................................................................
Memory Mirroring.......................................................................................................
Online Spare Memory..................................................................................................
121
121
124
126
128
130
Installing and Removing a PCI Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Installation ................................................................................................................... 135
Removal ....................................................................................................................... 139
Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Installing or Removing a Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Installation ................................................................................................................... 142
Removal ....................................................................................................................... 144
Installing and Removing a Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Installation ................................................................................................................... 147
Replacing a Failing Power Supply Unit ...................................................................... 150
Installing and Removing a Disk Array Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Installation ...................................................................................................................
Removal .......................................................................................................................
Use of internal hard disk drives in a disk array configuration.....................................
Use of a disk expansion unit in a disk array configuration..........................................
153
153
153
156
Installing and Removing a Backup Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Installation (IDE File Devices) .................................................................................... 157
Installation (SCSI File Devices) .................................................................................. 161
Removal ....................................................................................................................... 168
Installing and Removing a Redundant Hot-Swap Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Installation ................................................................................................................... 169
Removal ....................................................................................................................... 170
Problem Solving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Static Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Resetting the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
System Viewers ........................................................................................................... 174
Lamps........................................................................................................................... 175
Problems at initial System Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Problems After the System Has Been Running Correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
6
User Guide
www.bull.com
Problems Running New Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Problems and Suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Problems with the Server.............................................................................................
Problems with Disk Array Configuration....................................................................
Problems with Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions ....................................................
Problems with Windows Server 2003 R2....................................................................
Problems with Windows Server 2003 .........................................................................
Problems with ExpressBuilder.....................................................................................
Problems with Express Setup ......................................................................................
Problems with Disk Array Configuration ...................................................................
Problems with Master Control Menu ..........................................................................
Problems with Configuration Diskette Creator ...........................................................
Problems with Disk Array Configuration....................................................................
180
184
185
186
187
188
189
191
191
192
192
Collecting Dr. Watson Diagnostic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Memory Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Preparing for Memory Dumping ................................................................................. 194
Saving the Dump File .................................................................................................. 194
Off-Line Maintenance Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility.................................................................... 195
Off-line Maintenance Utility Features......................................................................... 196
If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Error Messages ............................................................................................................ 199
POST Error Messages.................................................................................................. 199
Beep Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
How to Identify BIOS Revision Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Power Lamp () .............................................................................................................
Status Lamp ()..............................................................................................................
Disk Access Lamp ()....................................................................................................
ACT Lamp () ...............................................................................................................
UID Lamp (UID) .........................................................................................................
Disk Access Lamp .......................................................................................................
Hard Disk Lamp...........................................................................................................
LAN Connector Lamps................................................................................................
AC Power Lamp ..........................................................................................................
205
205
207
207
207
208
208
209
210
Appendix 1: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Appendix 2: IRQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Interrupt Requests ........................................................................................................ 214
PIRQ and PCI Device ................................................................................................. 214
I/O Port Address .......................................................................................................... 215
Appendix 3: Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Making Backup Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Cleaning the External Surfaces of the system ............................................................ 217
Cleaning the Interior of the system.............................................................................. 217
Cleaning the Keyboard ................................................................................................ 218
7
User Guide
www.bull.com
Cleaning the Mouse ..................................................................................................... 219
Cleaning an Optical Drive and CD-Rom/CD-RW/DVD-Rom.................................... 219
System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Test Items .................................................................................................................... 221
Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics .............................................................. 222
Appendix 4: Installing Microsoft Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Before Installing Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Application of Service Pack ........................................................................................
Updating System..........................................................................................................
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk ...............
Manual Installation when the Disk Array Controllers are Connected.........................
Magneto-Optical device...............................................................................................
Media such as DAT .....................................................................................................
Floppy Disk Drive .......................................................................................................
Partition Size................................................................................................................
224
224
224
224
225
225
225
226
Installing Microsoft Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Creating "Windows 2003 OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder" ......................................
Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation ....................................................................
Reinstallation to Multiple Logical drives ....................................................................
Updating the System....................................................................................................
228
230
232
233
Driver Installation and Device Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
PROSet.........................................................................................................................
Network Driver ............................................................................................................
Re-install the Network Driver......................................................................................
Graphics Accelerator Driver........................................................................................
Installing SCSI Controller Drivers ..............................................................................
Installing a Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 114, SecuRAID 121) .............
Note on using the Adaptec 29320 Controller Board....................................................
About Windows Activation .........................................................................................
Available Switch Options for Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini File ............................
234
234
235
236
236
236
237
238
239
Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug Information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Appendix 5: Installing Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions . .241
Before Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Installing Service Pack.................................................................................................
Updating System..........................................................................................................
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk ...............
Manual Installation when the Disk Array Controllers are Connected.........................
Magneto-Optical device...............................................................................................
Media such as DAT .....................................................................................................
Floppy Disk Drive .......................................................................................................
Partition Size................................................................................................................
241
241
241
241
242
242
242
243
Installing Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Creating "Windows 2003 x64 EditionsOEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder" ..................
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation ...............................................
Reinstallation to Multiple Logical drives ....................................................................
Updating the System....................................................................................................
244
246
248
249
Driver Installation and Device Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
PROSet......................................................................................................................... 250
8
User Guide
www.bull.com
Network Driver ............................................................................................................
Re-install the Network Driver......................................................................................
Optional Network Board Driver ..................................................................................
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT)/Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB) .............................
Graphics Accelerator Driver........................................................................................
Installing SCSI Controller Drivers ..............................................................................
Installing a Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 114, SecuRAID 121) .............
250
252
252
253
254
254
254
Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug Information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Appendix 6: Installing and Using Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
ExpressBuilder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
ExpressBuilder for DOS-Based with Local Console.................................................. 259
ExpressBuilder for DOS-based with Remote Console ................................................ 264
ExpressBuilder for Windows-Based (Master Control Menu) ..................................... 266
Configuration Diskette Creator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver ..................................................................... 269
NEC ESMPRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Functions and Features ................................................................................................ 270
Power Console Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Major Functions...........................................................................................................
Components ................................................................................................................
Server Setup.................................................................................................................
Management PC Setup.................................................................................................
271
271
272
273
NEC DianaScope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
MegaRAID Storage ManagerTM (Server) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Setup with Express Setup ............................................................................................ 275
Manual Setup ............................................................................................................... 275
MegaRAID Storage ManagerTM (Management PC).................................................. 275
Appendix 7: Installing the Operating System with Express Setup . . . .276
About Express Setup.................................................................................................... 277
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Installation Notice........................................................................................................
Setup Flow ...................................................................................................................
Installing Microsoft Windows Server 2003.................................................................
Installing and Setting Device Drivers..........................................................................
Setting for Solving Problems.......................................................................................
Updating the System - Installing Service pack............................................................
Making Backup Copies of System Information ..........................................................
Installing with the OEM-FD for Mass Storage Device ...............................................
279
283
284
290
296
300
300
301
Appendix 8: Equipment Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Appendix 9: Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
9
User Guide
www.bull.com
Text Conventions
This guide uses the following text conventions.
Warnings, cautions, and notes have the following meanings:
Warning
Warnings alert you to situations that could result in serious personal injury or loss of life.
Caution
Cautions indicate situations that can damage the system hardware or software.
Notes: give important information about the material being
described.
■ Names of keyboard keys are printed as they appear on the keyboard. For example,
Ctrl, Alt, or Enter.
■ Text or keystrokes that you enter appear as boldface type. For example, type
abc123 and press ENTER.
■ File names are printed in upper case letters. For example, AUTOEXEC.BAT.
10
User Guide
www.bull.com
Safety Notices
Caution
To reduce the risk of electric shock which could cause personal
injury, follow all the safety notices.
Symbols are shown in your documentation and on your
equipment to indicate safety hazards.
Regulatory Information
European Notice
Products with the CE marking comply with both the Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive (89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) - modified by the
Directive 93/68/EEC - issued by the Commission of the European Community.
Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European
Standards:
■ EN55022: Radio Frequency Interference
■ EN55024 (1998+A1:2001): Immunity characteristics
■ EN6100-3-2: Limits for harmonic current emissions
■ EN6100-3-3: Limitation of voltage fluctuation and flicker in low-voltage supply
system
■ EN60950-1 (2001): Product Safety
Warning
This is a Class A product. In domestic environment this product
may cause radio interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures (EN55022).
If your system includes a telecommunication network board, the input/output socket is
classified as Telecommunication Network Voltage (TNV-3).
11
User Guide
www.bull.com
USA and Canada Notice
Products with UL marking comply with the following UL standards:
■ UL 1950 (3rd edition 1998)
Products with FCC marking comply with the following FCC standards
■ FCC part 15
The model type/ref. used for UL and FCC certification can be found on the regulatory
labels stuck on your system.
The equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A or B
digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Modifications to the Product
CE and FCC Marking
We cannot be held responsible for modifications made by the User and the
consequences thereof, which may alter the conformity of the product with the CE or
FCC Marking.
Connections and Remote Earths
PELV (Protected Extra Low Voltage)
To ensure the extra-low voltage integrity of the equipment, only connect equipment
with mains-protected electrically-compatible circuits to the external ports.
SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage)
Every input and output of this product is classified as Safety Extra Low Voltage.
Remote Earths
To prevent electrical shock, connect all local (individual office) systems and system
support equipment to the same electrical circuit of the building wiring. If you are
unsure, check the building wiring to avoid remote earth conditions.
Building Supply
Only connect the equipment to a building supply that is in accordance with current
wiring regulations in your country. In the U.K., those are the IEE regulations.
12
User Guide
www.bull.com
Power Supply and Cables
Power Supply
■ The DC push-button on/off switch on the front panel does not turn off the system
AC power. +5vdc is present on the system board whenever the AC power cords are
connected between the system and an AC outlet. Before doing the procedures in
this manual, make sure that your system is powered off and unplug the AC power
cords from the back of the chassis. Failure to disconnect power before opening
your system can result in personal injury and equipment damage.
■ Under no circumstances should the user attempt to disassemble the power supply.
The power supply has no user-replaceable parts. Inside the power supply are hazardous voltages that can cause serious personal injury. A defective power supply
must be returned to your dealer.
Cables
■ In the U.S.A. and Canada, the power cord must be a UL-listed detachable power
cord (in Canada, CSA-certified), type ST or SJT, 16 AWG, 3-conductor, provided
with a moulded-on NEMA type 5-15 P plug cap at one end and a moulded-on cord
connector body at the other end. The cord length must not exceed 9 feet (2.7
meters).
■ Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, the plug must be rated for 250 VAC, 10 amp
minimum, and must display an international agency approval marking. The cord
must be suitable for use in the end-user country. Consult your dealer or the local
electrical authorities if you are unsure of the type of power cord to use in your
country. The voltage change occurs via a switch in the power supply.
■ The detachable power supply cords are intended to serve as the disconnect devices.
■ For PLUGGABLE EQUIPMENT, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the
equipment and shall be easily accessible.
■ This equipment has a 3-wire, grounded power cords. To prevent electrical hazards,
do not remove or defeat the ground prong on the power cords. Replace a power
cord if it gets damaged. Contact your dealer for an exact replacement.
Batteries
Lithium batteries can be dangerous. Improper handling of lithium batteries may result
in an explosion. Dispose of lithium batteries as required by local ordinance. Also see
“Product Disposal” on page 14
Chassis Cover Removal and Replacement
When servicing your system, make sure to replace the chassis cover and secure it with
the screws before plugging in the power cable and turning it on. The chassis cover
ensures proper airflow and cooling.
13
User Guide
www.bull.com
Laser Compliance Statement
The optical devices are tested and certified to be compliant with International Electrotechnical Commission IEC60825-1 and European EN60825-1 standards for Class 1
laser products.
Class 1 laser products are not considered hazardous. The optical devices are designed
such that there is never human access to laser radiation above a Class 1 level during
normal operation or prescribed maintenance conditions.
The optical devices installed in your system is designed for use solely as a component
of such electronic product and therefore does not comply with the appropriate
requirements of Code of Federal Regulation Sec. 1040.10 and Sec. 1040.11 for
COMPLETE laser products
Warning - Hazardous Voltage!
Hazardous voltage is present inside your system when it is connected to an AC supply
even when the system’s power switch is off. Exposure to Hazardous Voltage could
cause personal injury. To reduce the risk of electric shock which could cause personal
injury, follow all safety notices. The symbols shown are used in your documentation
and on your equipment to indicate safety hazards.
Warning -Avoid Electrostatic Discharge!
Circuit cards and integrated circuits can be easily damaged by static electricity. To
reduce risk of damage, store them in protective packaging whenever they are not
installed in your system.
Before you install or remove memory modules, video memory, disk drives, circuit
cards or other devices, protect them from static electricity. To do so, make sure your
system’s power switch is OFF. Then, unplug the system’s AC power cord(s). Wear an
anti-static wrist strap (available at electronic supplies stores) to handle the device you
want to install. Be sure to connect the wrist strap to an unpainted metal portion of the
system chassis.
As an alternative, you can dissipate electrostatic buildup by touching an unpainted
metal portion of the system chassis with one hand. Handle the device you are installing
with the other hand, and maintain continuous contact with the unpainted portion of the
chassis until it is installed in the system.
Product Disposal
The Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive
requires that used electrical and electronic products must be disposed of
separately from normal household waste in order to promote reuse,
recycling and other forms of recovery and to reduce the quantity of waste
to be eliminated with a view to reduce landfill. WEEE includes accessories
such as keyboard, mouse, remote control, speakers, etc. When you dispose of such
products, please follow the agreement made between you and us and/or your
distributor.
14
User Guide
www.bull.com
Using This Guide
This user's guide provides a quick reference to information about your server system.
Its goal is to familiarise you with your system and the tasks necessary for system
configuring and upgrading.
This guide contains the following information:
■ Chapter 1, contains information about the front, back and internal features of your
system and about the motherboard. It lists the standard and optional features of
your system and provides details about the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM. It also
provides rack version of your system specific information.
■ Chapter 2, helps you installing the server in an appropriate place, make
connections and start using your system.
■ Chapter 3, shows you how to configure your system and helps you set up the
various options.
■ Chapter 4, provides all the information you need to remove components from your
system and install new ones. You will find in this chapter how to install hard disk
drives, upgrade memory, install optical devices... etc.
■ Chapter 5, gives you information about how to solve the various issues you may
encounter with your system.
15
User Guide
www.bull.com
Related Documents
In addition to this User Guide, several other documents are included with your system
either as electronic files (on the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM) or as paper copy shipped
with your server.
We recommend you read these additional documents as it becomes necessary when
setting up, using or upgrading your server system.
16
User Guide
www.bull.com
Care and Handling
Use the following guidelines to properly handle and care for your system.
Protect the system from extremely low or high temperatures. Let
the system warm (or cool) to room temperature before using it.
Keep the system away from magnetic forces.
Keep the system dry. Do not wash the system with a wet cloth or pour fluid
into it.
Protect the system from being bumped or dropped.
Check the system for condensation. If condensation exists, allow it to
evaporate before powering on the system.
Keep the system away from dust, sand, and dirt.
17
User Guide
www.bull.com
System Overview
Your Bull NovaScale R460 server is a modular, multiprocessing server based on the
Intel® Xeon™ microprocessor. It is a solid performer and offers the latest technology.
The combination of computing performance, memory capacity, and integrated I/O
provides a high performance environment for many server market applications. These
range from large corporations supporting remote offices to small companies looking to
obtain basic connectivity capability such as file and print services, e-mail, web access,
web site server, etc.
Your server is housed and available as a rack-mount system. Your server conveniently
installs into a standard EIA 19-inch rack assembly.
Figure 1: Bull NovaScale R460 Server
18
User Guide
www.bull.com
System Features
Your motherboard features the following major components and fonctionalities.
High Performance
■ One or two Intel® Xeon™ dual core processors with 4 MB of cache memory, in
LGA771 sockets.
■ High-speed network interface (1000 Mbps/100 Mbps/10 Mbps supported).
■ High-speed disk access, Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) technology.
■ High-speed memory access (Fully Buffered DIMM DDR2-533 or DDR2-667).
Expandability
■ Up to 48 GB of memory.
■ PCI Slots:
- Full-height: 1 PCI EXPRESS (x8) slot, 2 PCI-X (64-bit/100MHz) slots
- Low-Profile: 1 PCI EXPRESS (x8) slot, 2 PCI EXPRESS (x4) slots
■ Six hot-swap SAS hard disk drive bays.
■ One removable media expansion bay.
■ Two network ports, and one management port.
Main Features
■ Integrated Graphics Accelerator support (2 MB).
■ El Torito bootable CD-ROM support.
■ Power switch mask.
■ Software power-off.
■ Remote power-on feature.
■ AC-Link feature.
■ Consoleless feature.
■ Embedded PC-compatible support (serial, parallel, mouse, keyboard, USB, LAN,
and video).
■ Integrated optical drive, and optional floppy disk drive.
To get comfortable with your computer, take a tour around your system by reading the
sections hereafter.
19
User Guide
www.bull.com
System Chassis Features
External View
2
1
6
5
3
4
Figure 2: External View
1
Drive cover
2
Logic cover
3
Switches, indicators, and front I/Os
4
Backup file device bay
5
Optical disk drive
6
SAS hot-plug hard disk drive bay
20
User Guide
www.bull.com
Front View with Front Bezel Closed
The following figure shows the location of the front system features.
7
ID
4-1
3
4-2
6
5
2
1
Figure 3: Front View with Front Bezel Closed
1
Front bezel
The front bezel is a cover protecting the front devices during daily operation. A security key is provided
to lock the cover.
2
Key slot
Insert the security key into this slot when unlocking the front bezel.
3
Status lamp (green/amber) (on the front panel)
This lamp indicates the server status. The lamp is green during normal operation. The lamp turns
amber or flashes when the server enters the abnormal state.
4
ACT lamp (green)
This lamp is on while the system is connected to the network. The number "1" on the icon indicates
LAN port 1, and the number "2" indicates LAN port 2.
5
Disk Access lamp (green/amber)
This lamp is green during access to the internal hard disks. The lamp turns amber when even one of
the internal hard disks fails.
6
Power lamp (green)
This lamp turns green when the power is turned on.
7
UID lamp (blue)
This lamp goes on when the UID switch is pressed. (The lamp also goes on or blinks when software
issues a command.)
21
User Guide
www.bull.com
Front View with Front Bezel Removed
13
13
10
13
11
12
3-0
3-1
3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5
5
6-1 6-2 6-3
2
2
1
1
9 7
8
Figure 4: Front View with Front Bezel Remved
1
Captive thumb screws (1 at the right and left each)
The screws secure the server to the rack.
2
Handles (1 at the right and left each)
Hold the handles when dismounting/mounting the server from/in the rack.
3
Hard disk bays
4
Mount hard disks in the bays. Each number following the bold-faced number indicates the SCSI ID or SAS
port number. In the standard configuration, hard disk drive trays are mounted in all the bays.
Disk lamp (green/amber)
Lights green when the hard disk is being accessed.
Lights amber when the hard disk fails.
5
Flashes alternatively green and amber during the build process (in disk array configuration only).
ODD/FDD bay
Contains an optical disk drive.
6
Optical disk drive
7
This drive reads/writes data from the optical disk drive.
6-1 Emergency hole
6-2 Disk access lamp
6-3 CD tray eject button
USB connectors (2 ports)
Connect USB devices via these connectors.
8
Serial port B (COM B) connector
Used to communicate with the remote console via direct connection.
9
Backup device bay
Mount an optional DAT or AIT drive in this bay.
10
11
UID (Unit ID) switch
Press this switch to turn on/off the UID lamps on the front and rear panels of the server. Pressing the switch
once turns on the lamps. Pressing it again turns them off.
Power switch
22
User Guide
www.bull.com
Press this switch to turn on/off the power.
While the system is off, press the switch once to turn on the power, and the POWER lamp goes on.
While the system is on, press the switch once to turn off the power.
12
13
If required, press the switch for 4 seconds or more to forcibly turn off the power.
DUMP switch (NMI switch)
Press this switch to dump memory.
Lamps (See the previous page for the six lamps.)
23
User Guide
www.bull.com
Rear View
1
2
14 13
3
4
8-1
10
11 9 8-2
12
171816
7
6
5
17 15-1 16 17 15-2 16
Figure 5: Rear View
1
Low-profile PCI board extension slots
Mount PCI boards of the low-profile type into the slots. The slots are called 3C, 2C, and 1C from top.
2
Captive thumbscrew
Secures the logic cover.
3
Full-height PCI board extension slots
Mount PCI boards of the full-height type in the slots. The slots are called 3B, 2B, and 1B from top.
4
AC inlet
Connect the provided power cord to this socket.
5
AC power lamp
6
This LED turns green and flashes when the power supply receives the AC power from the power cord.
The LED grows steadily after supplying the DC power to the system (power-on).
Turns amber when a power failure occurs.
Flashing in amber indicates no AC power is received in the redundant configuration.
Power supply unit (power supply slot 1)
This unit supplies power to the server.
7
Power supply unit extension slot (power supply slot 2)
8
Mount an optional power supply unit in this slot. The slot is protected with the blank cover in the
standard status.
USB connectors
Connect device compliant with the USB interface to this connector.
9
UID lamp (blue)
10
This lamp goes on when the UID switch is pressed. (The lamp also goes on when software issues a
command.)
DUMP switch
Press this switch to dump memory.
11
UID (Unit ID) switch
12
Press this switch to turn on/off the UID lamps on the front and rear panels of the server. Pressing the
switch once turns on the lamps. Pressing it again turns them off.
VGA connector
Connect the display unit to this connector.
13
Serial port A (COM A) connector
24
User Guide
14
www.bull.com
Connect device having a serial interface to this connector. Use COM B connector to communicate with
the remote console. A leased line cannot be connected directly to this connector.
Mouse/keyboard connectors
Connect the mouse and keyboard to the connectors through the provided relay cables.
15
LAN connectors
16
Connect network systems on the LAN to the connectors.
The number "1" following the bold-faced number indicates LAN port 1, and the number "2" indicates LAN
port 2.
Speed lamp (amber)
This lamp indicates the transmission speed of the LAN.
17
LINK/ACT lamp (green)
This lamp indicates the access status of the LAN.
18
Management LAN Port
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T interface port used to manage the server via the LAN.
25
User Guide
www.bull.com
Internal View
1
2-1
2-2
3
4
2-5
2-6
2-7
5
2-8
6
A
B
10
2-4
2-3
9
Figure 6: Internal View
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Front side
Rear side
Backplane
Cooling fans
2-1: FAN1
2-2: FAN2
2-3: FAN3
2-4: FAN4
2-5: FAN5 (optional redundant fan)
2-6: FAN6 (optional redundant fan)
2-7: FAN7 (optional redundant fan)
2-8: FAN8 (optional redundant fan)
Support arm
Power supply unit
Motherboard
Riser card
Chassis intrusion switch
DIMM (Two DIMMs are mounted as standard in slots #11 and #21)
Processor (mounted under the heat sink)
Front panel board
26
8
7
User Guide
www.bull.com
System board Features
Motherboard
2 3 456
1
78
14
9 10 11 12 13
18-1
19
18-2
17
A
B
8 16 15
Figure 7: Motherboard
A
B
1
Front side
Rear side
Main power connector
Power signal connector
USB file device connector
4
5
6
USB connector
Redundant fan jumper
Connectors
Not used in this system
7
8
Password clear jumper switch
Configuration jumpers
Keep the factory settings.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
RAID socket
Lithium battery
CMOS jumper switch
SAS hard drive 2 connector
SAS hard drive 1 connector
RAID configuration jumper
PCI riser slot
(Only for low profile boards).
16
PCI riser card slot
(Only for full height boards).
17
DIMM sockets (for the interleave type)
27
8
User Guide
www.bull.com
(The sockets are called 41, 42, 43, 11, 12, 13, 21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 33, sequentially from top).
18
Processor sockets
19
18-1 Processor #1 (CPU #1).
18-2 Processor #2 (CPU #2).
Backplane connector
ACPI
The mother board supports the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) as
defined by the ACPI 2.0 specifications. An ACPI aware operating system can put the
system into a state where the hard drives spin down, the system fans stop, and all
processing is halted. However, the power supply will still be on and the processors will
still be dissipating some power, so the power supply fans will still run.
The system board supports sleep states s0, s1, s4, and s5:
■ s0: Normal running state.
■ s1: Processor sleep state. No context will be lost in this state and the processor
caches will maintain coherency.
■ s4: Hibernate or Save to Disk: The memory and machine state are saved to disk.
Pressing the power button or other wakeup event will restore the system state from
the disk and resume normal operation. This assumes that no hardware changes
have been made to the system while it was off.
■ s5: Soft off: Only the RTC section of the CSB and the BMC are running in this
state. No context is saved by the OS or hardware.
Caution
The system is off only when the AC power cord is disconnected.
Onboard Remote Management Card (RMC)
Server management is concentrated in the Remote Management Card (RMC). The
RMC and associated circuitry are powered from a 5Vdc standby voltage, which
remains active when system power is switched off, but the ac power source is still on
and connected.
The RMC supports NEC DianaScope, which allows remote server management
through the network. Events monitored by the manager system include overtemperature and over-voltage conditions, fan failure, or chassis intrusion.
Information on NEC DianaScope may be found in the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM.
One major function of the RMC is to autonomously monitor system management
events, and log their occurrence in the nonvolatile System Event Log (SEL). The
events being monitored include overtemperature and overvoltage conditions, fan
failure, or chassis intrusion. To enable accurate monitoring, the RMC maintains the
28
User Guide
www.bull.com
nonvolatile Sensor Data Records (SDRs), from which sensor information can be
retrieved. The RMC provides an ISA host interface to SCR sensor information, so that
software running on the server can poll and retrieve the server's current status.
The RMC performs the following:
■ Monitors server board temperature and voltage*
■ Monitors processor presence and controls Fault Resilient Boot (FRB)
■ Detects and indicates baseboard fan failure*
■ Manages the SEL interface
■ Manages the SDR Repository interface
■ Monitors the SDR/SEL timestamp clock
■ Monitors the system management watchdog timer
■ Monitors the periodic SMI timer
■ Monitors the event receiver
■ Controls secure mode, including video blanking, diskette write-protect monitoring,
and front panel lock/unlock initiation
■ Controls Wake On LAN via Magic Packet support.
*NEC ESMPRO also supports these features.
Degradation Feature
The degradation feature automatically isolates a failed DIMM or processor to assure
continuous operation of the server when the POST (Power On Self-Test, self-diagnosis
program after power on) detects such a DIMM or processor.
Note: The degradation feature is only available when at
least two DIMMs or processors are installed.
Failed DIMMs and processors may be identified on the screen that the POST displays,
or with the BIOS setup utility of the server, "SETUP." They may also be identified on
the system that has the NEC ESMPRO installed.
Memory RAS Features
Your server board has memory mirroring and online spare memory features. For more
information see “Using the Memory RAS Features” on page 126.
Remote Power-On Feature (Wake On LAN)
The remote power-on function turns on the server through a network. It sends a special
packet from the management computer to a remote server to turn it on if the server is
off-powered.
29
User Guide
www.bull.com
To enable this feature, use the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See “BIOS Setup
Utility” on page 68.)
The remote power-on feature is not available in the following cases. Press the POWER
switch once to start the OS, and turn off the server in an appropriate procedure.
■ Abnormal previous system shut-down
■ No power supply to the server (due to turned-off breaker, disconnected power
cord, power blackout, etc.)
AC-Link Feature
When the power cord of the server is connected to an uninterruptible power supply
(UPS) unit, the server supports the power linkage feature that enables control over the
power supply from the UPS to the server. The AC-Link feature can be enabled or
disabled with the Server menu of the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See “BIOS Setup
Utility” on page 68.)
30
User Guide
www.bull.com
Standard Features
High performance
Expandability
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Intel®
Xeon®
High-speed network interface (1000 Mbps/
100 Mbps/10 Mbps supported)
High-speed disk access
(Serial Attached SCSI)
High-speed memory access (240-pin, 72-bit
ECC registered DDR DIMM (DDR2-533 or
DDR2-667)
■
■
Two PCI EXPRESS (x8) connectors
Two PCI EXPRESS (x4) connectors
Two PCI-X (64-bit/66MHz) connectors
Large memory of up to 48 GB
Six hot-swap SAS hard disk drive bays
Up to two multi-processors are available for
upgrade.
One backup file bay
USB2.0 interface (A USB-support driver is
required.)
High-reliability
Many Available Features
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Remote Management Controller
Memory monitoring feature (single-bit error
correction/multiple-bit error detection)
CPU/memory degradation feature (logical
isolation of a failed device)
Memory chipkill feature
Memory mirroring/online spare memory
feature
Bus parity error detection
Temperature detection
Error notification
Internal fan monitoring feature
Internal voltage monitoring feature
Redundant power supply (hot-swap)
RoMB (RAID on motherboard)
Auto-rebuild feature (hot-swappable)
BIOS password feature
Mechanical security lock
Redundant fans (option)
■
■
■
■
■
El Torito Bootable CD-ROM (no emulation
mode) format support
POWER switch mask
Software power-off
Remote power-on feature
AC-Link feature
Consoleless feature
Self-diagnosis
■
■
Power On Self-Test (POST)
Test and Diagnosis (T&D)
Management Utilities
Easy and Fine Setup
■
■
■
■
■
■
NEC ESMPRO
NEC DianaScope
Maintenance Features
■
■
Off-line Maintenance Utility
Memory dump feature using the DUMP switch
31
ExpressBuilder (system setup utility)
Configuration Parameter Diskette Creator
SETUP (BIOS configuration utility)
Software RAID Setup Utility (Onboard RAID
configuration utility)
User Guide
www.bull.com
System Security
To help prevent unauthorized entry or use of the system, the system includes a full
lockable front bezel and Server Management software that monitors the front bezel
intrusion switch.
Security with Mechanical Locks and Monitoring
To unlock the bezel, insert the key in the lock and turn the lock counterclockwise until
it stops (about a quarter turn). The bezel is now unlocked and can be opened again.
To lock the bezel, insert the key in the lock. Turn the lock clockwise until it stops
(about a quarter turn). The bezel is now locked and cannot be opened.
Software Locks via the BIOS SETUP Utility
The BIOS SETUP Utility provides a number of security features to prevent
unauthorized or accidental access to the system. Once the security measures are
enabled, you can access the system only after you enter the correct password(s). For
example:
■ Mask the power switch function after the power-on.
■ Set and enable a supervisor password.
■ Set and enable a user password.
■ Disable access to the boot sector of the operating system hard disk drive.
32
User Guide
www.bull.com
ExpressBuilder CD-ROM
Please setup the server using the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM both when setting it up for
the first time, and when you make changes to its configuration.
With the ExpressBuilder CD you can:
■ Install the Operating System, using the Express Setup.
■ Diagnose the system, using the System Diagnostics tool.
■ Create a support disk; this disk will be used to manually install a Microsoft
operating system.
■ Update the BIOS or the server firmware.
■ Update a Microsoft operating system, using the “Update BULL NovaScale
System” feature of the Master Control menu (available from the windows-based
ExpressBuilder).
■ Install utilities, such as management software for Windows (NEC ESMPRO, NEC
DianaScope, etc.), and DOS-based maintenance utilities (System Diagnostics, Offline Maintenance Utility, etc.). Windows-based applications are installed via the
Master Control menu, whereas DOS-based utilities are installed via the Tools
menu. Refer to the appendices for more information.
■ Read the on-line documentation (Windows systems only).
Note: Some of the above features can be performed
remotely using a cross cable (COM) or LAN.
Software End-User License Agreement
Carefully read the terms and conditions of the Software End User License Agreement
printed on the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM sleeve.
33
User Guide
www.bull.com
Setting Up the System
Overview
This chapter describes how to select a site, unpack the system, make cable connections,
and power on the system units. Information on front and rear panel features, switches
and LEDs are also included in this chapter.
Setup Flow
Follow the flowchart below to set up the server.
Selecting the server site
Select a suitable site for the server. Assemble the 19-inch rack assembly.
Unpacking the system
Unpack the server and accessories from the chipping carton box.
Installing the server
Install the server into the rack assembly.
Connecting peripheral devices
Connect peripheral devices to the server.
Connecting the power cord
Connect the power cord to the server.
Turning on the server
Power on the server to start software setups. Setups depend on the optional internal devices installed and
the peripheral devices connected.
Installing the operating system
Install an operating system to the server. .
Installing the utilities
Install the utilities in the provided ExpressBuilder CD-ROM..
34
User Guide
www.bull.com
Making backup copies of system information
After all the system setup procedures are completed, make backup copies of system information.
System information is required for recovering the server from the trouble or after replacing the system
board.
Selecting Server Site
To use the server, install it on a standard EIA 19-inch rack assembly.
Refer to the documentation attached to the rack or contact your sales agent for the
installation of the server on the rack.
Warning
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury.
See “General Safety Information” on page 103 for details.
■ Do not use the server in any unapproved place.
■ Do not connect the ground line to a gas pipe.
Caution
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to
follow these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property
damage. See “General Safety Information” on page 103 for
details.
■ Do not carry or install the server only by a single person.
■ Do not install the server where the load may be concentrated on a specific point.
■ Do not install any component on the server only by a single
person.
■ Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable.
■ Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the
rack.
■ Do not provide the wiring exceeding the rating power.
Do not install the rack in the places listed below. Installing the rack or mounting the
server on the rack in such a place may cause some malfunction to occur.
■ Narrow space from which devices cannot be pulled out from the rack completely
35
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ Place that cannot bear the total weights of the rack and devices mounted on the
rack
■ Place where stabilizers cannot be installed or where the rack can be installed only
after the practice of proper earthquake-resistant construction
■ Place of uneven or slanting floor
■ Place of drastic temperature change (near a heater, air conditioner, or refrigerator)
■ Place where intense vibration may be generated
■ Place where corrosive gas is generated, chemicals are nearby, or chemicals may be
accidentally sprayed over
■ Place where a carpet not subject to anti-static process is laid.
■ Place where some objects may be fallen on the rack
■ Place near a device generating intense magnetic field (such as a TV, radio,
broadcast/communication antenna, power transmission wire, and electromagnetic
crane) is placed (If unavoidable, contact your sales agent to request proper shield
construction.)
■ Place where the power cord of the server must be connected to an AC outlet that
shares the outlet of another device with large power consumption.
■ Place near equipment that generates power noise (e.g., contact spark at power-on/
power-off of commercial power supply through a relay). If you must install the
server close to such equipment, request your sales agent for separate power cabling
or noise filter installation.
36
User Guide
www.bull.com
Unpacking the System
When you receive your system, inspect the shipping containers prior to unpacking. If
the shipping boxes are damaged, note the damage, and if possible, photograph it for
reference. After removing the contents of the containers, keep the cartons and the
packing materials. If the contents appear damaged when you unpack the boxes, file a
damage claim with the carrier immediately.
37
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installing the Server
This section provides the instructions needed to install (and remove) the rack-mount
server into a standard EIA 19-inch rack cabinet.
Warning
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury.
See “General Safety Information” on page 103 for details.
■ Do not use any rack which does not conform to the relevant
standard.
■ Disconnect the power cord(s) before installing or removing
the server.
Caution
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to
follow these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property
damage. See “General Safety Information” on page 103 for
details.
■ Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the
rack.
■ Do not lift the server only by a single person.
■ Always install the server in the specified place.
■ Do not install the server on the rack leaving the cover
removed.
■ Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components.
Restricted Access Location
The server is intended for installation in a restricted access location, mounted above a
non-combustible material.
ESD Precaution
An electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, option boards, and other
components. You can provide some ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strap
attached to chassis ground when handling system components.
Electronic devices can be easily damaged by static electricity. To prevent damage, keep
them in their protective packaging when they are not installed in your system.
38
User Guide
www.bull.com
Checking Components
Check that you have the necessary components to install the server in the rack (screws,
cage nuts, sliding rails)..
Required Tools
You only need a Phillips screwdriver to install the server on the rack.
Installation Procedure for Rack
This server can be installed in a rack. Follow the steps below to install the server in the
rack:cage nut
Caution
When installing the optional cable arm, see the instructions
manual provided with the cable arm.
Preparing before Installation
The slide rail is fixed with the screw to prevent its falling off during transportation.
Remove the left and right cage nuts from the front of the server before you isntall the
server in the rack.
A
B
Figure 8: Removing the cage nut before Installing the Server
A
B
Set screw
cage nut
Hold the cage nut, and rotate the set screw to remove the cage nut.
Keep the removed cage nuts for future use.
Removing the Rail Assemblies
Remove the sliding rails from the server.
39
User Guide
www.bull.com
Hold the rails and slowly slides them toward the rear of the server until a "click" is
heard. The click indicates that the rails are locked.
Push the release levers on the right and left sides of the server, and remove the rail
assemblies from the server while unlocking.
A
Figure 9: Rails Release Levers
A
Release lever
Only the inner rails remain screwed to the server when the rail assemblies have been
removed.
B
Figure 10: Inner Rails
B
Inner rails
Caution
The removed rail assemblies are to be installed on the inner
rails later. To install each rail assembly on the correct inner rail,
make a mark on the assemblies. Similarly, when installing
more than one server, distinguish between the pairs of inner
rails and rail assemblies of the servers by making marks.
Installing the cage nuts
Install three cage nuts on the front of the rack for each of the right and left sides and
also two cage nuts on the rear of the rack for each of the right and left sides.
40
User Guide
www.bull.com
Install three cage nuts in 1U (the minimum unit of rack height). Three slots (angle
holes) are opened per 1U of a rack. Install the cage nuts at the three slots. For two cage
nuts installed on the front of the rack, the upper and lower nuts are used to fix the front
of the rail assembly, and the center is used to support the set screw of the server. The
cage nuts installed on the rear of the rack are used to fix the rear of the rail assemblies.
Hang either clip of a cage nut on a square hole on the rack and insert another clip into
the hole by using a tool such as a flat tip screwdriver.
Note: Check that all the cage nuts are installed at the level.
Installing the Rail Assemblies
Make sure which is the right side rail assembly or the left one prior to installing them.
1. Loosen the screws (S) securing the rail assembly.
S
Figure 11: Rail Assembly Screws (S)
2. Align the front and rear frames of rail assembly to the location where the cage
nuts are installed.
Locate the rail assembly so that the frame of the rack is located between cage
nuts and frames of rail assembly.
41
User Guide
www.bull.com
Note: Check that the portion of the frame to fix the rail
assembly is located in front of the rack frame.
3. Firmly secure the rail assembly.
Installing the Server
Caution
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to
follow these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property
damage. See “General Safety Information” on page 103 for
details.
■ Do not lift the server only by a single person.
■ Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components.
42
User Guide
www.bull.com
4. Pull out the sliding rails of the right and left rail assemblies until they are
locked.
5. At least two persons are required to install the server. Securely hold the server
and install it in the rack.
Firmly fit the inner rails on the sides of the server into the rail assemblies that
are installed on the rack, and then slowly push the server into the rack.
If the server is locked on its way into the rack, slowly push it in while pressing
the release levers (B) on the right and left sides of the server.
When the server is installed for the first time, the mechanical parts are rather
hard to slide. You may feel strong friction when pushing in the server. In this
case, strongly push it in.
B
43
User Guide
www.bull.com
6. Check that the sliding rails work normally by pulling the server out of the rack
and pushing it in several times.
Note: Check that the sliding rails work normally. If the
sliding rails are stuck to the rack frame and do not come out,
reinstall them.
Securing the Server
0
3
1
4
2
5
C
1. Push the server into the rack as far as it will go.
2. Tighten the right and left captive thumb screws (C in the above figure) on the
front panel to secure the server to the rack.
3. Install the front bezel.
A
B
A: Frame
B: Tabs
Installing the Optional Cable Arm
If you have an optional cable arm, follow the procedure below to install it:
44
User Guide
www.bull.com
Warning
■ This cable arm shall be installed on the Bull NovaScale
R460. Do not use the cable arm for any other unit. This
may cause people to be injured and/or surrounding devices
to be damaged.
■ Install the cable arm on the basic processing unit carefully
not to cause people to be injured.
■ Do not disassemble, repair, and alter the cable arm. This
may cause people to be injured and/or the cable arm and
surrounding devices to be damaged.
Caution
■ Do not install the SCSI cable on the cable arm.
■ Always pull out the unit from the rack after removing the
cables which are not installed on the cable arm.
Unpacking
After unpacking the package of the cable arm, check that the appropriate accessories
are contained in the package.
The components shown in the figure below are required to install the cable arm on the
server.
45
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installing
1. Install one end of the cable arm on the rail bracket
A
B
A
B
Rail bracket
Cable arm
Figure 12: Installing the Cable Arm on the Rail Bracket
2. Hook the arm stopper A on the nail of slide rail bracket.
B
C
A
D
Detail A
B
C
D
Slide rail bracket
Nail
Arm stopper A
Figure 13: Hooking the Arm Stopper A on the Slide Rail Bracket
46
User Guide
www.bull.com
3. Push the Stopper bracket (D in figure below) in the direction A and then push
the pin (E in figure below) in the direction B until stopper bracket locks.
D
A
B
E
C
C
D
E
Lock
Stopper bracket
Pin
Figure 14: Locking the Stopper Bracket
4. Install the other end of the cable arm (arm stopper B) into the guide of the inner
rail.
B
A
A
B
Arm stopper B
Guide of inner rail
Figure 15: Installing Arm Stopper B into Guide of Inner Rail
47
User Guide
www.bull.com
5. Insert the Arm stopper B into the guide of the inner rail until it locks.
A
A
Arm stopper B
Figure 16: Inserting Arm Stopper B into Guide of Inner Rail
6. Before fixing the cables to the arm, remove and then insert the unit for several
times to check the following.
■ The cable arm is moved smoothly.
■ The unit can be mounted on the rack securely.
Without any trouble, temporarily fix the cables to the arm with repeat ties.
48
User Guide
www.bull.com
Next, fix the cables to the arm securely with the unit pulled out from the rack.
The installation is now completed.
Figure 17: Cable Arm Installed
This completes the installation of the server.
Removing the Server from the Rack Assembly
The server should be removed from the rack by at least two persons.
Warning
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious
personal injury. See “General Safety Information” on page 103
for details.
■ Do not lift the server only by a single person.
■ Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components.
■ Note high temperature.
■ Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable.
■ Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the
rack.
49
User Guide
www.bull.com
1. Check that the power of the server is OFF, and disconnect the power cable and
all the interface cables connected to the server.
2. Release the security lock (D in figure below) to remove the front bezel.
D
Figure 18: Removing the Front Bezel
3. This step is only required when the optional cable arm is mounted.
Remove the two screws securing the cable arm, and dismount the cable arm
from the server.
4. Loosen the two captive thumb screws (E in figure below).
5. Hold the handles (F in figure below) and pull out the server from the rack
slowly and carefully.
The server clicks to be latched.
E
0
3
1
4
2
5
E
F
F
6. Pull out the server from the rack with the right and left release levers (G in
figure below) pressed to release the latch.
G
Figure 19: Pulling the Server Out of the Rack
50
User Guide
www.bull.com
Caution
■ Pull out the server slowly holding the bottom of the server by
at least two persons.
■ Do not apply any load on the server pulled out from the rack.
Doing so may cause personal injury if the server drops.
To remove some mechanical parts of the rack, see the installation procedure.
51
User Guide
www.bull.com
Making Connections
Connecting Peripheral Devices
The server is provided with connectors for wide variety of peripheral devices on its
front and rear. The figure on the next page illustrates available peripheral devices for
the server in the standard configuration and locations of the connectors for the devices.
Caution
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire, personal
injury, or property damage. See “General Safety Information”
on page 103.
■ Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of
the server plugged to a power source.
■ Do not use any unauthorized interface cable.
Caution
■ Power off the server and a peripheral device before connection. Connecting a powered peripheral device to the powered server will cause malfunctions and failures.
■ To connect a third-party peripheral device or interface cable
to the server, consult with your sales agent for availability of
such a device or cable. Some third-party devices may not
be used for the server.
■ A leased line cannot be connected directly to the serial port
connectors.
■ Secure the power cord(s) and interface cables with a tie
wrap.
■ Form the cables in such a way that they will not come into
contact with the door or the guide rails on the sides of the
server.
■ Form the power cord with a slight slack at the AC inlet of the
server. This is to prevent the power cord from coming off
when the server is pulled out from the rack.
■ Do not apply any pressure to the plug of the power cord.
52
User Guide
www.bull.com
1
4
5
3
9
8
6
7
Figure 20: System Connections
53
2
10
User Guide
www.bull.com
1
Serial Port 2
2
Front USB Ports (x2)
3
4
LAN Connectors 1 &2
5
6
7
8
9
Management port
Connect a device with a serial interface
Note: a Management PC cannot be connected on this port, but only to
serial port B (BIOS Setup changes are required). A leased line cannot be
connected directly to this connector.
Connect your network or hub.
PS/2 Keyboard Port
Connect a PS/2 keyboard, using the provided “Y” cable.
PS/2 Mouse Port
Connect a PS/2 mouse, using the provided “Y” cable.
VGA Port
Connect the monitor.
Rear USB Ports (x2)
10
Power Inlet
Connect any USB device.
Note: USB keyboard and mouse are not supported
When all peripherals are connected, finally connect the provided power
cable to a 15 A rated wall outlet or to a BackUPS
Serial Port 1
Connect a device with a serial interface (e.g. Management PC)
Note: A leased line cannot be connected directly to this connector.
Connect any USB device.
USB keyboard and mouse are not supported
54
User Guide
www.bull.com
Connecting the Power Cord
Connect the provided power cord to the server.
Warning
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious
personal injury. See “General Safety Information” on page 103.
■ Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.
■ Do not connect the ground wire to a gas pipe.
Caution
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire, personal
injury, or property damage. See “General Safety Information”
on page 103.
■ Do not plug the power cord in to an improper power source.
■ Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal
number of connections.
■ Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.
■ Use the authorized power cord only.
55
User Guide
www.bull.com
1. Plug the provided power cord into the power receptacle on the rear of the
server.
2. Plug the other end of the power cord into the wall outlet. The AC power LED
on the power supply turns green and flashes.
A
Figure 21: Plugging the power cord
A: AC Power LED
Note: Secure the power cord with an AC cord holder that
comes with your server.
To connect the power cord from the server to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS),
use service outlets on the rear of the UPS. Refer to the manual that comes with the
UPS.
The UPS service outlets are categorized into two groups: SWITCH OUT and UNSWITCH OUT. (They may be called "OUTPUT1" and "OUTPUT2".)
To control power supply with an application (NEC ESMPRO/UPSController) that
controls the UPS, connect the power cord to an SWITCH OUT outlet.
For constant power supply, connect the power cord to a UN-SWITCH OUT outlet.
(Connect the modem that is in service for 24 hours to this outlet.)
56
User Guide
www.bull.com
<Example>
BREAKER
250V/ 25A
EXT
E
P
N
INPUT
AC100W/
2
OUTPUT
(UNSWITCHOUT)
G
OUTPUT(SWITCH OUT)
AC100V 50/50HZ
A
B
A
B
UN-SWITCH OUT (output 2)
SWITCH OUT (output 1)
Figure 22: UPS Service Outlets
When the power cord from the server to a UPS, change the BIOS setup of the server to
link with power supply from the UPS.
To power on the server from the UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply), select [Server] [AC-LINK] - [Power On].
Change a parameter for "AC-LINK" under the Server menu of the BIOS SETUP
utility. See “BIOS Setup Utility” on page 68 for details.
57
User Guide
www.bull.com
Turning On the Server
Turn on the server and follow the on-screen instructions for setup.
Caution
Before turning on the server:
■ Some optional boards require setups with the SETUP utility
before installation. If the server has a PCI board with the
PCI-to-PCI bridge installed, the SETUP utility is enabled to
launch. Check on the board specifications to find out
whether it requires pre-installation setups before actually
installing the board.
■ Some installed optional devices or connected peripheral
devices require setups before proceeding to the next step.
To use the server with no optional devices installed besides the
graphic board, install a desired OS to the server.
1. Make sure all external devices, such as a video display, keyboard, and mouse
(optional) have been connected, and the power cords are connected.
2. Power on the video display and any other external devices.
Note: If the server power cord(s) is connected to a power
control unit such as an UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply),
make sure that the power control unit is powered on.
3. Make sure that the floppy disk drive contains no floppy disk and the DVDROM drive contains no bootable CD-ROM.
4. Open the front bezel.
5. Press the POWER switch (A in figure below).
Notes:
■ If the power cord is connected to the power control unit such
as the UPS, turn on the power control unit.
■ If a remote management card (RMC) is installed in your
server, connect the power cord and wait a few seconds
before pressing the POWER switch. The POWER switch
does not work in a few seconds after connecting the power
cord due to RMC firmware start-up.
58
User Guide
www.bull.com
B
A
Power switch
A
Power lamp
B
Figure 23: Power Switch & Power Lamp
The POWER lamp on the front of the server lights on.
In a few seconds, the Bull logo appears on the screen and the Power On Self-Test
(POST) begins.
The POST runs automatically when you power on the server or reset it with a keyboard
operation (Ctrl + Alt + Delete). The POST runs diagnostics, initializes the server, sets
interrupt vectors, detects installed peripheral devices, and boots the operating system
(if installed).
If the server halts before completing the POST, the POST emits a beep code indicating
a fatal system error requiring immediate attention. (See “Troubleshooting Guide” on
page 174 for troubleshooting information.)
During memory test, the POST displays the amount of memory it was able to access
and test. Depending on the amount of installed memory, it may take several minutes to
complete the memory test.
Note: The factory-set is defined to hide the POST screen
with the Bull logo screen. You can always change the Bull logo
screen to the POST screen by pressing Esc. To change the
start-up screen, use the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See
“BIOS Setup Utility” on page 68 for details.)
During the POST, you will see the banner message to prompt you to launch the BIOS
SETUP utility stored in ROM on system board or on an installed option board.
Start the BIOS SETUP utility appropriate to your system environment to change the
BIOS setup. For the BIOS SETUP for the server, see “BIOS Setup Utility” on
page 68. For the BIOS SETUP for the option board, refer to the manual that comes
with the option board.
59
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installing Operating System
See “Appendix 4: Installing Microsoft Windows Server 2003” on page 224 for more
information on installing a Microsoft operating system.
To install other operating systems, contact your sales agent.
Notes:
■ Use ExpressBuilder for initial setup of your server. The
ExpressBuilder is a support software for the BULL NovaScale server. It simplifies the process of installing and configuring your server.
■ Before installing the operating system, adjust the system
date and time by using the BIOS setup utility "SETUP." See
“BIOS Setup Utility” on page 68
Installing Utilities
Install the utilities that come with the server. See “Appendix 6: Installing and Using
Utilities” on page 257 for more information.
Making Backup Copies of System Information
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific
information for the server.
Save the information after completing the system setup.
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.
Note: An optional USB floppy disk drive is required.
You can save the information by the following process.
1. Insert the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM in the DVD-ROM drive and reboot the
system.
2. Select [Tools].
3. Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].
4. Select [System Information Management].
5. Insert a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.
6. Select [Save].
60
User Guide
www.bull.com
Using the System
The following subsections describe how to use this server system properly and safely,
including an explanation of the server system power on/off sequences, what the POST
program checks in the server, and how to perform a forced power shutdown.
When using the server system the following precautions should be observed.
■ Make sure you power off the server before connecting or disconnecting cables
between the server and peripheral devices. Connecting or disconnecting the cables
while the server is powered on may cause malfunction or failures within the server.
■ Verify that the access lamp on the diskette drive is unlit before turning off the
server or ejecting the floppy disk. Turning off the server or ejecting the floppy disk
while the access lamp is lit may damage data being stored on the floppy disk.
■ After turning off the server, wait at least 30 seconds before turning it on again.
Cycling the power immediately may cause malfunction or failures of the server.
■ Before relocating the server, turn off the power and unplug the power cord from
the outlet. Moving the server when it is powered may cause malfunction or failures
of the server.
■ Clean the server regularly. Regular cleaning prevents failures of the server and its
components.
■ Lightning may cause a momentary voltage drop. To prevent this problem, an
uninterruptible power supply unit is recommended.
■ Only use options qualified for the server. A non-qualified option may be mounted
or connected to the server, but it may fail to operate normally or even cause failures. These types of failures are not covered under warranty.
61
User Guide
www.bull.com
Powering On Your System
Caution
■ If the power cord is connected to a power control device
such as a UPS (Uninterruptive Power Supply), make sure
that the power control device is powered.
■ Do not turn off the server until characters following the BootBIOS logo appears on the screen.
Power on your system as follows.
1. Make sure all external devices, such as a video display, keyboard, and mouse
(optional) have been connected, and the power cords are connected.
2. Power on the video display and any other external devices.
Note: If the server power cord(s) is connected to a power
control unit such as an UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)
make sure that the power control unit is powered on.
3. Make sure no bootable media in inserted into the optical drive.
4. Press the POWER switch (A) on the front of the computer chassis to power on
the system. The POWER lamp (B) lights green. If it is not lit, ensure the ac
power cord is connected to a functional ac power source.
B
A
After a few seconds your system begins the internal Power-On Self Tests (POST).
POST automatically checks the system board, CPU(s), memory, keyboard, mouse, and
most installed peripheral devices. POST also displays the start messages of the BIOS
setup utility during execution.
The POST check results should be checked in the following cases:
62
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ When the server is being used for the first time.
■ When the server appears to fail.
■ When the server beeps many times between power-on and OS start-up.
■ When an error message appears on the screen.
Note: For error messages that appear on the display unit,
refer to subsection “Error Messages” on page 199 in this
Guide.
Caution
Always allow POST to complete before powering down your
system.
If you have problems powering on your system, refer to “Problem Solving” on
page 172.
After you have successfully powered on your system, insert the ExpressBuilder CDROM into the CD-ROM device, reboot the system and follow the screen prompts to
run ExpressBuilder.
POST Execution Flow
The following describes the progress of POST in the chronological order.
Caution
■ Do not make key entries or perform mouse operations while
POST is in progress.
■ Some system configurations may display the message
"Press Any Key" to prompt a key entry. This message is
driven by BIOS of an installed optional board. Make sure to
read the manual that comes with the optional board before
any key entry.
■ Powering on the server, after you installed or removed an
optional PCI board or moved it to another slot, may display
the message that indicates incorrect board configuration and
suspend POST.
In such a case, press F1 to continue POST. Board configuration can be made using the utility described later.
63
User Guide
www.bull.com
1. After a few seconds from power-on, POST starts checking the memory. The
count message of the basic and expansion memory appears at top left on the
display unit screen. The memory check may takes a few minutes to complete
depending on the memory size of the server. Also, it may take approximately
one minute for the screen display to appear after rebooting the server.
2. Some messages appear upon completion of the memory check. These
messages appear to indicate that the system has detected the CPU, baseboard
management controller, keyboard, and mouse.
3. After a few seconds, POST displays the following message prompting you to
launch the BIOS SETUP utility stored in the system memory of the server.
This message appears at bottom left on the screen.
Press <F2> to enter SETUP, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> to Network
Launch the BIOS setup utility when you need to change the settings to meet the
requirements for the server. As long as the above message is not displayed with
an error message, you don't have to launch the utility. (Ignore the message.
POST will automatically proceed.)
To launch the SETUP utility, press F2 while the above message is displayed.
The server automatically restarts POST all over again when you exit the
SETUP utility.
The message "<F4> Service Partition" is displayed if you have created a
maintenance partition during setup using Express Setup. Press F4 to boot the
system from maintenance partition.
The message "<F12> to Network" prompts you network booting (PXE boot). If
you press F12, the POST searches for boot device on network.
4. If your server uses onboard RAID feature, the following message is displayed
to prompt you to run RAID utility.
Press <Ctrl><M> to run LSI Logic SoftwareRAID Setup Utility
Press Ctrl + M to run the utility. For detail explanation, see Chapter 4 for
detail.
Caution
The LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility is used to manage
the data stored in hard disk drive, or for maintenance.
5. If the POST detects the optional add-in card, it display the message prompting
you to launch the add-in card BIOS configuration utility. (Ignore the message.
POST will automatically proceed a few seconds later.)
Refer to the manual that comes with the optional add-in card for detail.
64
User Guide
www.bull.com
6. If you set a password using the BIOS setup utility, SETUP, the password entry
screen appears upon successful completion of POST.
Up to three password entries will be accepted. Three incorrect password entries
disable the server to boot. In such a case, turn off the power and wait about ten
seconds before turning on to boot the server.
Caution
Do not set a password before installing an OS.
7. The OS starts when POST completes.
Identification of Servers (UID Switch)
An "UID (Unit ID) LED" is provided on the front panel and rear panel. If more than
one server is mounted in a single rack, the LED identifies the server you are going to
maintain.
The UID LED goes on when the UID (Unit ID) switch on the front panel is pressed. It
goes off when the switch is pressed again.
Maintenance from the rear of the rack has to be carried out in a dark, narrow space. The
interface cable of a server or power supply unit in normal state may be disconnected by
accident in this situation. To prevent this problem, you should start maintenance after
confirming the target server by using the UID switch.
B
Figure 24: Front of the server
A: UID switch
B: UID LED
65
A
User Guide
www.bull.com
A
B
Figure 25: Rear of the server
A: UID switch
B: UID LED
Powering Off the Server System
When server system power is on, pressing the power on/off switch on the front panel of
the server turns the power off.
To turn the server system power off:
1. Shutdown the operating system (OS).
2. If necessary, press the POWER switch on the front of the computer chassis
again to power off the system. The POWER lamp lights off.
3. Power off the peripheral devices.
Note: If the server power cord is connected to a power
control unit such as an UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply),
refer to the UPS user's guide for proper power-off procedures.
Forcing a Power Shutdown
A forced power shutdown can be used when the power on/off switch does not power
off the server or the reset functions do not work.
To perform a forced power shutdown:
■ Press in on the power on/off switch located on the front panel of the server for at
least 4 seconds to force the server power off.
To power on after a forced shutdown, wait 10 seconds and then power on again.
66
User Guide
www.bull.com
Configuring Your System
Configuration and setup utilities are used to change your system configuration. You
can configure your system, as well as option boards you may add to your system, using
the BIOS Setup Utility. Several unique system parameters are configured using the
BIOS Setup, which is stored in the system FLASH memory.
The LSI Logic SoftwareRAID Setup Utility configures the disk array and logical drives
connected to the onboard RAID controller.
If your system has been factory configured, the BIOS Setup Utility does not need to be
run unless you want to change the password or security features, add certain types of
option boards or devices, upgrade your system board or change the RAID
configuration.
This chapter also provides information on several system configuration parameters that
are set by jumpers on the system board. However, these parameters do not usually
require change.
67
User Guide
www.bull.com
BIOS Setup Utility
The BIOS Setup Utility is used to change system configuration parameters. The utility
is resident in the system FLASH memory and does not require a diskette or an
operating system present to run.
Using the BIOS Setup Utility
You can access the BIOS Setup utility when you turn on or reboot your system.
Note: The server is factory-configured with the best
parameters. Run the Setup utility only when it is required.
To run the BIOS Setup Utility, perform the following procedure:
1. Power-on or reboot the system. “Press <F2> to enter SETUP” displays.
2. Press F2. The BIOS Setup Utility starts and the Main Menu is displayed. The
menu bar at the top of the Main Menu lists the following selections:
Table 1: BIOS Setup Menus
Menu
Use
Main Menu
Advanced Menu
Use this menu for basic system configuration.
Security Menu
Server Menu
Use this menu for setting passwords.
Boot Menu
Use this menu to configure Boot Device priority.
Exit Menu
Exits the current menu.
Use this menu for setting the Advanced Features available on
your system.
Use this menu to configure server specific options, the redirection
console and to display server information.
Use the arrow keys to select a menu or an item on a displayed menu. Press the value
keys (listed in the table below) to cycle through the allowable values for the selected
field. Use the Exit menu’s “Save Values” selection to save the current values on all the
menus.
To display a submenu, position the cursor on a selection that has a submenu and press
ENTER. An arrow precedes selections with submenus.
Refer to the following table for information on the keys that you use with BIOS Setup.
These keys are also listed at the bottom of the Setup menu.
Table 2: BIOS Setup Keys
Key
Function in Setup Menu
F1 or Alt-H
Get Help about an item.
ESC
Exit the current menu and return to the previous menu.
Left or right arrow keys
Move between menus.
Up or down arrow keys
Move cursor up and down. The cursor moves only to the settings
that you can change.
68
User Guide
www.bull.com
Table 2: BIOS Setup Keys (Continued)
Key
Function in Setup Menu
F9
Load default configuration values for this menu.
F10
Save configuration values and exit.
ENTER
Execute command or Select ✟ submenu.
BIOS Setup Configuration Settings
The BIOS Setup Configuration tables show the default settings for the BIOS Setup
Utility and provide a place for you to record any changes you make to these settings.
Recommended values are bold in the following tables.
69
User Guide
www.bull.com
Main Menu
Table 3: Main Menu
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Description
System Time
HH:MM:SS
Set the System Time.
System Date
MM/DD/YYYY
Set the System Date.
Hard Disk Pre-Delay
Disabled
3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 21,
30 Seconds
Allows to add a delay before the first
access of a hard disk drive by the
BIOS.
Primary IDE Master
Selects sub-menu
Primary IDE Slave
Selects sub-menu
Secondary IDE Master
Selects sub-menu
Secondary IDE Slave
Selects sub-menu
Processor Settings
Selects sub-menu
Language
English (US)
Français
Deutsch
Español
Italiano
Your Setting
Select the display language for the
BIOS.
Primary and Secondary Master & Slave IDE submenus
Table 4: Primary And Secondary Master And Slave IDE Submenus
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Description
Type
Auto
None
User
CD-ROM
Select Auto if a device is attached to the
IDE or serial ATA channel. It is strongly
recommended to keep the factory setting
Auto
Multi-Sector
Transfer
Disabled
2 Sectors
4 Sectors
8 Sectors
16 Sectors
Enables or disables multiple sector
transfers support. This field is
informational only, for Type Auto.
LBA Mode Control
Enabled
Disabled
LBA stands for "logical block addressing".
Instead of referring to locations by
passing to the disk a cylinder, head and
sector number (CHS addressing), the
sectors are serialized so that each just
has an integer number; 0, 1, 2, etc. up to
the total number of sectors on the disk.
Disabled will disable the LBA mode, Auto
will enable it if the IDE device supports it.
This field is informational only, for Type
Auto.
32-Bit I/O
Disabled
Enables/disables the 32-Bit IDE data
transfer mode.
Enabled
70
Your Setting
User Guide
www.bull.com
Table 4: Primary And Secondary Master And Slave IDE Submenus (Continued)
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Description
Your Setting
Transfer Mode
Standard
Fast PIO 1
Fast PIO 2
Fast PIO 3
Fast PIO 4
FPIO 3/DMA1
FPIO 4/DMA2
Select the method for moving data to/from
the drive. This field is informational only,
for Type Auto. This field is updated to
display only the modes supported by the
attached device.
Ultra DMA
Disabled
Mode 0
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 5
Selects the DMA mode used for moving
data to/from the drive. This field is
informative only for Type Auto.
Processor Settings Submenu
Table 5: Processor Settings Submenu
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Description
Processor Retest
Yes
No
If Yes is selected, the BIOS will
clear historical processor status
and retest the processor on
next boot.
Processor Speed
Display only
Displays the processor speed
detected by the BIOS
Processor 1 CPUID
Display only
Displays the processor CPU ID
detected by the BIOS, if
present
Disabled indicates that the CPU
is defective.
Processor 1 L2
Cache
Display only
Displays the processor level 2
cache detected by the BIOS
Processor 2 CPUID
Display only
Displays the processor CPU ID
detected by the BIOS, if
present
Disabled indicates that the CPU
is defective.
Processor 2 L2
Cache
Display only
Displays the processor level 2
cache detected by the BIOS
Execute Disabled
Bit
Disabled
Displays the CPU which
supports Execute Disabled Bit
Intel(R)
Virtualization Tech
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Your Setting
Enables or disables the Intel(R)
Virtualization Technology.
Note: The BIOS may display more options that presented
here.
71
User Guide
www.bull.com
Advanced Menu
Table 6: Advanced Menu
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Memory
Configuration
Select submenu
Description
PCI Configuration
Select submenu
Peripheral
Configuration
Select submenu
Advanced Chipset
Control
Select submenu
Boot-time
Diagnostic Screen
Disabled
Enabled
Enables or disables the display
of the diagnostic screen during
boot. If disabled, the Bull logo is
displayed.
Reset Configuration
Data
No
Yes
Select Yes if you want to clear
the Extended System
Configuration Data (ESCD)
area.
NumLock
On
Off
Selects power on state for
NumLock.
Memory/Processor
Error
Boot
Halt
If Boot is selected, the system
will attempt to boot after a
memory or processor error.
Your Setting
Memory Configuration Submenu
Table 7: Memory Configuration Submenu
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Description
System Memory
Display only
e.g. 640 KB
Extended Memory
Display only
e.g. 784896 KB
DIMM Group #1
Status
Display only
DIMM Group #2
Status
Display only
DIMM Group #3
Status
Display only
DIMM Group #4
Status
Display only
Indicates the current memory
status. "Normal" indicates the
normal status, "Disabled" indicates a memory error, and "Not
installed" indicates no DIMM
installed (display only).
Group #1 indicates DIMMs in
DIMM sockets #11 and #21.
DIMM Group #5
Status
Display only
Group #2 indicates DIMMs in
DIMM sockets #31 and #41.
DIMM Group #6
Status
Display only
Group #3 indicates DIMMs in
DIMM sockets #12 and #22.
Group #4 indicates DIMMs in
DIMM sockets #32 and #42.
Group #5 indicates DIMMs in
DIMM sockets #13 and #23.
Group #4 indicates DIMMs in
DIMM sockets #33 and #43.
(Memory is interleaved and
DIMMs are used per pair.)
72
Your Setting
User Guide
www.bull.com
Table 7: Memory Configuration Submenu (Continued)
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Description
Memory Retest
No
Yes
Clears the memory error status
Extended RAM Step
1MB
1KB
Every location
Disabled
Test the extended memory
once per MB, per KB, every
memory location or no test.
Memory RAS
Feature
Interleave
Disables or enables the
memory mirroring feature.
Sparing
Disabled
Mirror
Enabled
Your Setting
Disables or enables the online
spare memory feature.
PCI Configuration Submenu
Table 8: PCI Configuration Submenu
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Onboard Video
Controller
Select submenu
Description
Onboard LAN
Select submenu
PCI Slot 1B/2B/3B
Option ROM
Disabled
Enabled
Used to enable or disable an
option ROM on a PCI board
connected to the full-height
riser card.
PCI Slot 1C/2C/3C
Option ROM
Disabled
Enabled
Used to enable or disable an
option ROM on a PCI board
connected to the low-profile
riser card.
Your Setting
PCI Device, Onboard Video Controller Submenu
Table 9: PCI Device, Onboard Video Controller Submenu
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Description
VGA Controller
Disabled
Enabled
Enables or disables the
Onboard VGA
Option ROM Scan
Auto
Allows selecting the onboard
VGA controller or optional PCI
VGA controller as the display
device that will be active when
the system boots.
Force
onboard VGA controller.
The “Force” option is selected
to use the onboard VGA
controller if the optional PCI
VGA controller is installed in
the system.
73
Your Setting
User Guide
www.bull.com
PCI Device, Onboard LAN Submenu
Table 10: PCI Device, Onboard LAN Submenu
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Description
LAN Controller
Disabled
Enabled
This option allows you to
enable or disable the onboard
LAN controller
LAN1 Option ROM
Scan
Disabled
Enabled
Initializes device expansion
ROM.
Only if Onboard LAN Controller
is enabled.
LAN2 Option ROM
Scan
Disabled
Enabled
Initializes device expansion
ROM.
Only if Onboard LAN Controller
is enabled.
Your Setting
Peripheral Configuration Submenu
Table 11: Peripheral Configuration Submenu
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Description
Serial Port A
Disabled
Enabled
Auto
Enables or disables the serial
port A
Base I/O address
3F8
2F8
3E8
2E8
Set the base I/O address for
serial port A
Interrupt
IRQ3
IRQ4
Set the interrupt for serial port A
Serial port B
Disabled
Enabled
Auto
Enables or disables the serial
port B
Base I/O address
3F8
2F8
3E8
2E8
Set the base I/O address for
serial port B
Interrupt
IRQ3
IRQ4
Set the interrupt for serial port B
USB 2.0 Controller
Disabled
Enables or disables the USB
2.0 controller.
Enabled
Parallel ATA
Disabled
Enabled
Multimedia Timer
Disabled
Enabled
Intel(R) I/O AT
Disabled
Enabled
Wake on LAN/PME
Disabled
Enabled
Enables or disables the Parallel
ATA.
Enables or disables the
multimedia timer feature.
Enables or disables the Intel(R)
Acceleration technology.
Enables or disables the remote
power-on funtion through the
onboard LAN and PCI devices.
74
Your Setting
User Guide
www.bull.com
Table 11: Peripheral Configuration Submenu (Continued)
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Description
Wake on Ring
Disabled
Enables or disables the remote
power-on funtion through a
serial port.
Enabled
Wake on RTC
Alarm
Disabled
Enabled
Enables or disables the remote
power-on funtion through the
RTC Alarm.
75
Your Setting
User Guide
www.bull.com
Security Menu
Note: Enabling the Supervisor Password field requires a
password for entering Setup. The passwords are not case
sensitive.
Table 12: Security Menu
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Description
Supervisor
Password is
Set
Clear
Indicates whether the
supervisor password is set
(display only).
User Password is
Set
Clear
Indicates whether the user
password is set (display only).
Set Supervisor
Password
Up to 8
alphanumeric
characters
Press Enter to display the
supervisor password entry
screen. With the supervisor
password, all SETUP menus
are available for access. This
option is available only when
you log into the SETUP utility
with the supervisor password.
Set User Password
Up to 8
alphanumeric
characters
Press Enter to display the user
password entry screen. With a
user password, only certain
menus are accessible. This
option is available only if the
Supervisor Password is set.
Password On Boot
Disabled
Enabled
Specify whether to request a
password entry at boot-up.
Administrator password setup
is required.
Only available if supervisor
password is set.
Fixed Disk Boot
Sector
Normal
Write Protect
Allows to write protect hard disk
boot sector to protect against
viruses.
Power Switch Inhibit
Disabled
Enabled
Enables or disables the power
switch.
When set to Enabled, once the
operating system has started,
you cannot turn off the system
using the power switch. Forced
shutdown is also unavailable.
(See “Forcing a Power
Shutdown” on page 66.)
76
Your Setting
User Guide
www.bull.com
Server Menu
Table 13: Server Menu
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Description
System
Management
Select Submenu
Console Redirection
Select Submenu
Event Log
Configuration
Select Submenu
Assert NMI on
PERR
Disabled
Enabled
Sets support of PCI bus parity
error (PERR).
Assert NMI on
SERR
Disabled
Enabled
Sets support of PCI bus system
error (SERR).
FRB-2 Policy
Disable FRB-2
Timer
Sets the FRB level 2 timer.
Disable BSP
Do not Disable BSP
Retry 3 Times
Boot Monitoring
Disabled
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
20 Minutes
Sets whether the boot
monitoring function is disabled,
or, if it is enabled, sets the time
limit for time out.
It is mandatory to install the
NEC ESMPRO Agent in order
to use this function.
25 Minutes
30 Minutes
35 Minutes
40 Minutes
45 Minutes
45 Minutes
50 Minutes
55 Minutes
60 Minutes
77
Your Setting
User Guide
www.bull.com
Table 13: Server Menu (Continued)
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Description
Boot Monitoring
Policy
Retry 3 Times
Specifies what happens when a
time out is detected during boot
monitoring.
Retry Service Boot
Always Reset
When Retry 3 Times is
selected, the system is reset
after a time out occurence, and
tries 3 times to boot the OS.
When Retry Service Boot is
selected, the system is reset
after a time out occurence, and
tries 3 times to boot the OS.
The system then tries to boot
from the service partition (3
times).
When Always Reset is
selected, the system is reset
after the time out occurence,
and tries repeatedly to boot the
OS.
Thermal Sensor
Disabled
Enabled
Specifies whether the thermal
sensor monitoring function is
enabled or not.
If a thermal error is detected
while this parameter is enabled,
the system stops at the end of
the POST.
BMC IRQ
Disabled
IRQ 11
POST Error Pause
Disabled
Enabled
Determines the routing of the
BMC Interrupt.
Specifies whether the system
waits for user intervention on
critical POST errors.
If no keyboard is connected to
the system, this option is
ignored and the system always
continues to bootup.
AC-LINK
Power On Delay
Time (Sec)
Stays Off
Last State
Power On
Sets the AC-LINK feature.
0 - 255
Sets the power-on delay time
whithin a 0 to 255 seconds
range.
Determines the mode of
operation if a power loss
occurs.
This parameter is valid when
“Power On “ or “Last State” is
specified for AC Link.
Platform Event
Filtering
Disabled
Enabled
This item is meaningless when
the notification feature of the
Remote Management Card is
enabled.
78
Your Setting
User Guide
www.bull.com
Caution
To power on the server from the UPS (Uninterruptible Power
Supply), select [Server] - [AC LINK] - [Power On].
The table below shows the operation when the AC power to the server is turn off once
and then on again, depending on the setting of "AC LINK."
Setting of AC LINK
System status before AC power off
Stay Off
Last State
Power On
Operating
Off
On
On
Aborting (DC power being off also)
Off
Off
On
Forced shutdown
Off
Off
On
79
User Guide
www.bull.com
System Management Submenu
Table 14: System Management Submenu
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Description
BIOS Version
e.g. 4N34
Displays the current BIOS
version number.
Board Part Number
Displays the motherboard part
number.
Board Serial
Number
Displays the motherboard serial
number.
System Part
Number
Displays the system part
number.
System Serial
Number
Displays the system serial
number.
Chassis Part
Number
Displays the chassis part
number.
Chassis Serial
Number
Displays the chassis serial
number.
Onboard LAN1
MAC Address
Displays the Onboard LAN1
port MAC adress.
Onboard LAN2
MAC Address
Displays the Onboard LAN2
port MAC adress.
Management LAN
MAC Address
Displays the Management LAN
port MAC adress.
BMC Device ID
Displays the BMC device ID.
BMC Device
Revision
Displays the BMC device
revision.
BMC Frimware
Revision
Displays the BMC firmware
revision.
SDR Revision
Displays the sensor data record
revision.
PIA Revision
Displays the platform
information area revision.
Your Setting
Console Redirection Submenu
Table 15: Console Redirection Submenu
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Description
BIOS Redirection
Port
Disabled
Serial Port A
Serial Port B
Specify the serial port to which
a hardware console is
connected.
ACPI Redirection
Port
Disabled
Serial Port A
Serial Port B
Specify the serial port to which
an ACPI console is connected.
Baud Rate
9600
19.2K
38.4K
57.6K
115.2K
Selects a baud rate for
communications with the
connected HW console.
Flow Control
None
XON/XOFF
CTS/RTS
CTS/RTS + CD
Select a flow control method.
80
Your Setting
User Guide
www.bull.com
Table 15: Console Redirection Submenu (Continued)
Feature
Choices or
Display Only
Description
Console Type
PC ANSI
VT100+
VT-UTF8
Specify the type of remote
console.
Remote Console
Reset
Disabled
Enables or disables the reset
function when an Escape
command is sent from the
remote console.
Enabled
Your Setting
Event Log Configuration Submenu
Table 16: Event Log Configuration Submenu
Feature
Clear All Event Logs
Choices or
Display Only
Description
Press Enter and select Yes to
clear the event log.
81
Your Setting
User Guide
www.bull.com
Boot Menu
Table 17: Boot Menu
Feature
Description
USB CDROM
USB CD-ROM drive
IDE CD
ATAPI CD-ROM (including DVD-ROM drive)
USB FDC
USB floppy disk drive
USB KEY
USB flash memory device
IDE HDD
IDE hard disk drives
PCI SCSI
Internal hard disk drives installed in your system (“Software RAID” is displayed in the RAID configuration.)
PCI DEV
IBA GE Slot xxxx
Onboard LAN.
LAN1: Slot 0C00, LAN2: Slot 0C01
Other indication
Optional PCI board connected to the riser module.
1. When the BIOS detects a bootable device, it displays the information on the
device in the relevant description.
To boot the server from a desired device, the device must be registered as a
boot device. (Up to eight boot devices can be registered.)
2. Pressing X after selecting a device allows the selected device to be registered
as a boot device or deleted from the registration.
When eight boot devices are registered, no other device can be registered as a
boot device, even if you press X. To register another device as aboot device,
you first need to delete the reigstration from a device which is not anymore
used to boot.
Pressing Shift + 1 after selecting a device enables/disables the selected device.
3. You can change the boot priority (first to eighth) of each device by using the up
and down arrow keys, and + and/or –.
To change the priority of a device, move the cursor to the device by using the
up and down arrow keys, and press + or –.
82
User Guide
www.bull.com
Exit Menu
You can make the following selections on the Exit Menu. Select an option using the up
or down arrow keys, then press <Enter> to execute the option. Pressing <Esc> does
not exit this menu. You must select one of the items from the menu or menu bar to
exit.
Table 18: Exit Menu
Choices
Description
Exit Saving Changes
Exits after writing all modified Setup item values to NVRAM.
F10 key can be used for this operation.
Exit Discarding Changes
Exits leaving NVRAM unmodified. User is prompted if any of
the setup fields were modified.
Esc key can be used for this operation.
Load Setup Defaults
Loads default values for all SETUP items.
F9 key can be used for this operation.
Load Custom Defaults
Loads the custom defaults for the BIOS Setup options.
Save Custom Defaults
Saves the current values as custom defaults. This menu is
only available once the Load Custom Defaults option has
been used.
Discard Changes
Read previous values of all Setup items from NVRAM.
Save Changes
Save changes to NVRAM without exiting the Setup.
83
User Guide
www.bull.com
RAID Configuration
This section describes how to configure the internal hard disk drives as the disk array
drive by using the onboard RAID controller. Refer to the manual of the optional disk
array controller for how to configure the hard disk drives by using the optional disk
array controller.
To use the hard disk drives installed in the disk expansion unit in a disk array, the
optional disk array controller is necessary. Refer to the manual of the optional disk
array controller or disk expansion unit for details.
Onboard RAID Features
You can configure a disk array (RAID0, RAID1, or RAID10) using the onboard RAID
controller of the server.
RAID0 (striping)
Stores data on two, three, or four hard disk drives by dividing it (striping). All the hard
disk drives can be accessed at the same time. This improves disk access performance in
comparison to using a single hard disk drive.
Caution
■ IRAID0 does not have data redundancy. When a hard disk
drive failure occurs, data cannot be restored.
■ The logical capacity of the array becomes a multiple of the
connected hard disk drives.
RAID1 (mirroring)
Stores the data being saved to one hard disk drive to another hard disk drive. This
method is called "mirroring." The data stored onto one hard disk drive is
simultaneously stored onto another hard disk drive. When a hard disk drive becomes
faulty, the one with the same data can be used. This ensures continuous operation.
Caution
■ RAID1 reads or writes data to/from the several hard disk
drives at the same time. The disk access performance is
lower than that of a single disk.
■ The logical capacity of the array is equal to one of the connected hard disk drives.
84
User Guide
www.bull.com
RAID10 (spanning of RAID1)
RAID10 is a RAID level combining RAID0 and RAID1.
Stores data on hard disk drives by dividing it (striping). Then, each striped data is
written onto hard disk drives in mirroring mode. Owing to this feature, high disk access
performance of RAID0 and, in addition, high reliability of RAID1 can be achieved.
Caution
The logical capacity of the array is equal to one of the connected hard disk drives.
Installing the Hard Disk Drives
Install two or more SAS hard disk drives to your server. See “Installing or Removing a
Hard Disk Drive” on page 141.
Caution
Use two hard disk drives of the same revolution.
Also use two hard disk drives of the same capacity if you are
going to configure the array in RAID1.
Enabling the RAID Feature
To configure a hard disk drive as RAID drive, change the setting of the RAID
configuration jumper switch on the motherboard.
Note: The factory-set value is to use the hard disk drive as
a single disk drive.
1. See the section “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 105.
85
User Guide
www.bull.com
2. Remove the logic cover. See “Logic Cover” on page 110.
3. Locate the position of the RAID configuration jumper on the motherboard as
shown below.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove the jumper from position 1 – 2 on jumper block.
Reinstall the jumper on position 2 – 3 on jumper block.
Reinstall the logic cover removed in Step 2.
Plug the power cord to your server and turn on the server.
Running LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility
1. When the full screen logo appears after you have powered on the server, press
Esc. The POST screen appears.
2. Check the description shown on the POST screen, then press Ctrl + M.
The LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility starts.
Figure 26: LSI Logic Software RAID Configuration Utility
TOP Menu (Management Menu)
To quit the utility, press Esc in the TOP menu of LSI Logic Software RAID Setup
Utility.
86
User Guide
www.bull.com
When a confirmation message appears, select [Yes].
When the above message appears, press Ctrl + Alt + Delete. The server reboots.
Menu Tree
+: Selection/execution parameter
←: Setting parameter.
•: Information display
>: Can be set (modified) after creation of logical drive
Table 19: Menu Tree
Menu
Description
+Configure
Performs Configuration settings
+Easy Configuration
Set configuration (Using fixed value)
+New Configuration
Set new configuration
+View/Add Configuration
Additional setting / viewing configuration
+Clear Configuration
Clear configuration
+Select Boot Drive
Chose Bootable Logical Drive
+Initialize
Initialize logical drive
+Objects
Various settings
+Adapter
Set disk array controller
+Sel. Adapter
Clear configuration
←Rebuild Rate
30
←Chk Const Rate
30
←FGI Rate
30
←BGI Rate
30
←Disk WC
Off
←Read Ahead
On
←Bios State
Enable
←Stop on Error
No
←Fast Init
Enable
←Auto Rebuild
On
←Auto Resume
Enable
←Disk Coercion
1GB
←Factoty Default
+Logical Drive
Logical drive operation
+Logical Drives
Select logical drive (when multiple logical drives exist)
+Initialize
Initialize logical drive
+Check Consistency
Check logical drive redundancy
87
User Guide
www.bull.com
Table 19: Menu Tree
Menu
Description
+View/Update Parameters
Display logical drive information
• RAID
Display RAID level
• SIZE
Display logical drive capacity
• Stripe SIZE
Display stripe size
• #Stripes
Display the number of hard disk drives in logical drive
• State
Display logical drive status
• Spans
• Disk WC
Off: Write through
On: Write back
• Read Ahead
+Physical Drive
Physical drive operation
+Physical Drive Selection Menu
Select physical drive
+Make HotSpare
Set as hot-spare disk for auto rebuilding
+Force Online
Make a disk online
+Force Offline
Make a disk offline
+Drive Properties
Display hard disk drive information
• Device Type
Hard disk drive type
• Capacity
Hard disk drive capacity
• Product ID
Hard disk drive model
• Revision No.
Hard disk drive revision
+Rebuild
Perform rebuilding
+Check Consistency
Perform logical drive redundancy check
88
User Guide
www.bull.com
Operating Procedures for Setup Utility
Creating/Adding Configuration
Run LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility
Set new configuration information (pack/logical drive settings)
Check the logical drive settings
Initialize logical drive
Perform Consistency Check
Exit LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility
1. Run the LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility.
Select "Configure" → "New Configuration" from the TOP menu (Management
Menu).
Select "View/add Configuration" to add a configuration.
89
User Guide
www.bull.com
Caution
■ Creating a configuration using the "New Configuration"
menu clears any existing configuration information. To add
configuration information to an existing configuration, select
"View/add Configuration."
■ You cannot create a Spanning of RAID1 or set the logical
drive capacity on the "Easy Configuration" menu.
Use the "New Configuration" or "View/Add Configuration"
instead.
2. When a confirmation message (Proceed?) is displayed, select "Yes."
The SCAN DEVICE starts (the scanning information is displayed at the bottom
of the screen). Upon completion of the SCAN DEVICE, the "New
Configuration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU" screen appears.
3. Move the cursor onto the hard disk drive to be packed by using the cursor key
and then press Space to select the hard disk drive.
The display for the selected hard disk drive changes from READY to
ONLINE.
90
User Guide
www.bull.com
4. Press F10 to set "Select Configurable Array(s)".
5. Press Space.
SPAN-1 is set.
6. Press F10 to create a logical drive.
The "Logical Drives Configure" screen appears. (The figure below shows an
example of RAID1 configured with two hard disk drives.)
7. Select "RAID," "Size", "DWC", "RA", or "Span" by using cursor keys. Then
press Enter to fix the selection and set each value.
(1) “RAID”: Sets the RAID level.
Parameter
Remarks
0
RAID0
1
RAID1
5
RAID5 (option)
10
Spanning of RAID1
The selectable RAID level varies depending on the number of hard disk drives
that configure a pack.
(2) “Size”: Sets the logical drive size.
Up to 40 logical drives can be created per disk array controller.
(3) “DWC”: Sets the parameter for the Disk Write Cache.
Parameter
Remarks
Off
Write through
On
Write back
91
User Guide
www.bull.com
(4) “RA”: Sets the parameter for the Read Ahead.
Parameter
Remarks
Off
Does not perform read ahead
On
Performs read ahead
(5) “Span”: Sets the Span.
Parameter
Remarks
SPAN=NO
Does not set span
SPAN=YES
Sets span
When performing SPAN, create two or more sets of the same pack at the pack
creation, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 27: SPANNING of RAID1
8. When all the settings are completed, select "Accept" and then press Enter to
create the logical drive.
The created logical drive is displayed in the "Logical Drive Configured"
screen.
9. After creating a logical drive, press Esc to close the screen.
Go back to the "Save Configuration?" screen and then select "Yes" to save the
configuration.
10. When the confirmation message shows that the configuration has been saved,
press Esc to return to the TOP menu screen.
11. On the TOP menu screen, select "Objects" → "Logical Drive" → "View/
Update Parameters" to check the logical drive information.
12. Select "Initialize" in the TOP menu screen.
13. When the "Logical Drives" screen appears, move the cursor to the logical drive
to be initialized, and press Space.
The logical drive is selected.
14. After selecting logical drive, press F10 to start initialization.
Press "Yes" when prompted for confirmation.
When the progress bar in the "Initialize Logical Drive Progress" screen
indicates 100%, initialization is completed.
15. Execute Check Consistency on the logical drive that has been initialized.
See "Check Consistency" for details.
92
User Guide
www.bull.com
16. Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit the LSI Logic Software RAID
Setup Utility.
Caution
■ Be sure to execute Check Consistency after creating configuration.
■ Check Consistency has two modes: "check and recover"
and "check only".
Manual Rebuild
Replace hard disk drive
Run LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility
Execute rebuilding
Exit LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility
1. Replace a hard disk drive and turn on the server.
93
User Guide
www.bull.com
2. Run the LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility.
3. Select "Rebuild" from the TOP menu.
The "Rebuild – PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU" screen appears.
4. Move the cursor onto the hard disk drive displaying "FAIL" and then press
Space to select it.
Multiple hard disk drives can be selected (simultaneous rebuilding.)
5. The "FAIL" indication for the hard disk drive selected starts blinking.
6. When the hard disk drive has been selected, press F10 to start rebuilding.
7. Press "Yes" when prompted for confirmation.
The rebuild process starts.
When the progress bar in the "Rebuild Physical Drives in Progress" screen
indicates 100%, the rebuilding is completed.
94
User Guide
www.bull.com
8. Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit the LSI Logic Software RAID
Setup Utility.
Setting Hot Spare
Install a hard disk drive
Run LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility
Set for hot spare.
Exit LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility
1. Install a hard disk drive to be used as hot spare, and then turn on the server.
2. Run the LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility.
3. Select "Objects" → "Physical Drive" from the TOP menu.
The "Objects - PHYSICAL DRIVE SELECTION MENU" screen appears.
4. Move the cursor onto the hard disk drive to be used as hot spare and press
Enter.
5. The "Port #X" screen appears. Select "Make HotSpare."
6. A confirmation screen appears. Select "Yes."
The hard disk drive indication is changed to "HOTSP."
95
User Guide
www.bull.com
7. Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit the LSI Logic Software RAID
Setup Utility.
Caution
■ Select "Objects" → "Physical Drive" → "Port #X" → "Force
Offline" to cancel the hot spare setting.
■ When two or more hard disk drives (of the same capacity)
are assigned as hot spare, rebuilding starts with the one with
the smaller CH number/ID number.
Check Consistency
Run LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility
Perform Check Consistency
Exit LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility
1. Run the LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility.
2. Select "Check Consistency" from the TOP menu.
The "Logical Drives" screen appears.
96
User Guide
www.bull.com
3. Move the cursor onto the logical drive to be checked, and press Space to select
it.
4. When a logical drive has been selected, press F10 to start the consistency
check.
5. When prompted to do so, press "Yes".
The consistency check starts.
When the progress bar in the "Check Consistency Progress" screen indicates
100%, the consistency check is completed.
6. Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit the LSI Logic Software RAID
Setup Utility.
Caution
■ Be sure to execute Check Consistency after creating a configuration.
■ Check Consistency has two modes: "check and recover"
and "check only".
Others
Clear Configuration
Clears the configuration information. Select "Configure" → "Clear Configuration"
from the TOP menu. Executing "Clear Configuration" clears all configuration
information on the disk array controller and hard disk drives. The configuration
information on all channels of the disk array controller is also cleared.
Notes:
■ When the configuration information on the disk array controller and that on the hard disk drive do not match (excluding at
the replacement of a aulty disk array controller), configuration may fail if you select the configuration information on the
disk array controller. In this case, execute "Clear Configuration" to create configuration again.
■ LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility cannot delete each
logical drive. Use MegaRAID Storage Manager instead.
Force Online
Puts online a hard disk drive being in the FAIL status.
Select "Objects" → "Physical Drive" → (select hard disk drive) → "Force Online"
from the TOP menu.
97
User Guide
www.bull.com
Rebuild Rate
Sets the Rebuild Rate.
Select "Objects" → "Adapter" → "Sel. Adapter" → "Rebuild Rate" from the TOP
menu.
Available value is between 0% and 100%. Default value (recommended) is 30%.
Hard disk drive information
Checks hard disk drive information.
Select "Objects" → "Physical Drive" → (select hard disk drive) → "Drive Properties"
from the TOP menu.
98
User Guide
www.bull.com
Configuring Motherboard Jumpers
With the pre-installed SETUP utility, you can set desired passwords to protect the data
stored in the server against access from unauthorized users.
If you forget the passwords, however, your only option is to clear them. The following
describes how to clear these passwords. You can also use the following procedure to
clear the CMOS data in the server.
Caution
■ Clearing the CMOS data resumes the factory-set configuration data.
■ After clearing CMOS, you must run the BIOS SETUP utility
and execute the following menus to reconfigure your motherboard.
– Load Setup Defaults in the Exit menu
– Memory Retest of Memory Configuration in the Advanced
menu
– Processor Retest of Processor Settings in the Main menu
■ Refer to “RAID Configuration” on page 84 for RAID configuration jumper setting.
■ Do not change any other switch settings. Any change may
cause the server to fail or malfunction.
Warning
Do not change any other switch settings. Any change may
cause the server to fail or malfunction.
99
User Guide
www.bull.com
A
B
Figure 28: Clear CMOS & Clear Password Jumpers
A
Clear password jumper
(1) Normal
(2) Clear password
B
Clear CMOS jumper
1-2 = Normal
2-3 = Clear CMOS
The following describes the clearing procedure.
Warning
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious
personal injury. See “General Safety Information” on page 103
for details.
■ Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
■ Do not remove the lithium battery.
■ Do not connect the ground line to a gas pipe.
Caution
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury.
See “General Safety Information” on page 103 for details.
■ Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself.
100
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ Make sure to complete board installation.
■ Do not install the server on a rack with leaving covers
removed.
■ Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components.
■ Note high temperature.
■ Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable.
■ Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the
rack.
101
User Guide
www.bull.com
Clearing CMOS or Password
To clear the CMOS or the password, do as follows:
1. Power off the server and disconnect the power cord and all the cables
connected on the rear of the server.
2. Remove the logic cover.
3. Locate the position of the jumpers on the motherboard (see Figure 28: on page
100).
4. For clearing the BIOS password, remove the jumper strap on the BIOS
password clear jumper. For Clearing the CMOS, move the jumper strap to the
CMOS clear position (2-3).
5. Connect the power cord and power on the server.
6. Wait until the “Password cleared” or “CMOS cleared” message is displayed
(about 5 seconds).
7. Power off the server and disconnect the power cord.
8. Re-install the jumper block to the default position.
9. Reinstall the cover removed in Step 2.
10. Plug the power cord and all the cables to the server and turn on the server.
11. Press F2 when prompted to run the BIOS Setup utility, and select "Load Setup
Defaults" at the Exit menu.
Caution
■ Clearing the CMOS data resumes the factory-set configuration data.
■ After clearing CMOS, you must run the BIOS SETUP utility
and execute the following menus to reconfigure your motherboard.
– Load Setup Defaults in the Exit menu
– Memory Retest of Memory Configuration in the Advanced
menu
– Processor Retest of Processor Settings in the Main menu
102
User Guide
www.bull.com
Upgrading Your System
General Safety Information
Warning
The DC push-button on/off switch on the front panel does not
turn off completely the system AC power. Also, +5vdc is present
on the system board whenever the AC power cord is connected
between the system and an AC outlet. Before doing the procedures in this manual, make sure that your system is powered off
and unplug the AC power cord from the back of the chassis.
Failure to disconnect power before opening your system can
result in personal injury and equipment damage.
Caution
Operating your system with the top covers removed can damage your system components.
For proper cooling and airflow, always replace the top covers
before powering on your system.
Warning
Avoid burns: If the system has been running, any installed processor and heat sink on the processor board(s) will be hot.
To avoid the possibility of a burn, be careful when removing or
installing components that are located near processors.
Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of approved optional peripheral
devices.
Static Precautions
An electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, option boards, and other
components. You can provide some ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strap
attached to chassis ground when handling system components.
103
User Guide
www.bull.com
Electronic devices can be easily damaged by static electricity. To prevent damage, keep
them in their protective packaging when they are not installed in your system.
104
User Guide
www.bull.com
Equipment Log
Use the equipment log form located at the end of this manual to record the model and
serial number of your system, all installed options, and any other pertinent information
specific to your system. You will need this information when configuring your system.
Tools Recommended for Upgrading Your
System
Depending on the upgrade, you will need one or more of the following tools:
■ Phillips screwdriver (#1 bit and #2 bit)
■ Flat-head screwdriver
■ Small needle nose pliers
■ Pen or pencil
■ ESD workstation or antistatic wrist strap (recommended)
Preparing Your System for Upgrade
To prepare your system for installation or removal of system components perform the
following procedure:
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions listed under “General Safety
Information” and “Static Precautions” at the beginning of this chapter.
2. Shutdown the operating system (OS).
3. If necessary, press the power on/off switch on the front panel of the server (see
See “Powering On Your System” on page 62.). The power-on LED goes out.
4. Power off the peripheral devices.
5. Unplug the system power cord(s) from the AC wall outlet(s).
Note: If the system power cord is connected to a power
control unit such as an UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply),
refer to the UPS user's guide for proper power-off procedures.
6. Unplug all the I/O cables connected to the rear panel of your system.
105
User Guide
www.bull.com
Removing and Replacing the Top Cover
The top cover is made of two separate parts. The front part (Drive Cover) must be
removed to install or remove a 5.25-inch optical device. The rear part (Logic Cover)
needs to be removed to install or remove DIMM or PCI boards.
This section explains how to:
■ Remove and install the front bezel, see “Front Bezel” on page 106 and pull the
server out from the rack.
■ Remove and install the drive cover, see “Drive Cover” on page 108
■ Remove and install the logic cover, see “Logic Cover” on page 110
The server needs to be pulled out from the rack for installing/removing any
components other than the hard disk drives and power supply units.
Caution
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious
personal injury.
■ Do not install the server on a rack with leaving covers
removed.
■ Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components.
■ Note high temperature.
■ Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable.
■ Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the
rack.
Front Bezel
1. See the section “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 105 to prepare.
2. Insert the attached security key into the key slot and turn the key to the front
bezel side with it pressed lightly to release the lock.
3.
Hold the right end of the front bezel lightly to pull it toward you (1 in figure
below).
106
User Guide
www.bull.com
4. Slide the front bezel to the left a little to remove the tab from the frame and
then remove the front bezel from the server (2 in figure below).
5. Loosen the two captive thumbscrews (B in figure below) on the front panel.
6. Hold the handles (C in figure below) and slowly pull out the server from the
rack until it locks.
B
B
C
C
When inserting the server back into the rack, push the release levers on the rails on the
sides of the server to unlatch the server. Be very careful not to get your finger caught in
doing so.
To install the front bezel, latch the tab (A) at the left side of the front bezel on the server
frame (B). After the installation, lock the front bezel by using the key for security.
A
B
107
User Guide
www.bull.com
Drive Cover
Open the drive cover when installing/removing a fan assembly, processor, and backup
file device or reconnecting an internal cable.
Removal
1. See the section “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 105 to prepare.
2. Pull out the server from the rack.
3. Slide the drive cover toward the front of the server while pressing the lock
button on the cover.
4. Lift off the drive cover from the server.
Figure 29: Removing the Drive Cover
Installation
When installing the drive cover, check that the tab of the cover is securely inserted into
the slot in the server frame.
Slide the drive cover toward the rear of the server. The drive cover is locked when a
distinct "click" is heard. At this time, check the release button for normal state.
Figure 30: Replacing the Drive Cover
108
User Guide
www.bull.com
Note: The system must be operated with the drive cover
installed to ensure proper cooling.
A
Figure 31: Relase Button
A: Closed
B: Open
109
B
User Guide
www.bull.com
Logic Cover
Open the logic cover when installing/removing a DIMM, processor, and PCI add-in
card or reconnecting an internal cable.
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
See the section “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 105 to prepare.
Pull out the server from the rack.
Loosen a captive thumbscrew at the rear of the server.
Slide the logic cover toward the rear of the server and lift off the cover from the
server.
Figure 32: Removing the Logic Cover
Installation
When installing the logic cover, check that the tab of the cover is securely inserted into
the slot in the server frame.
Slide the logic cover toward the front of the server and secure the cover with captive
thumbscrew.
Figure 33: Replacing the Logic Cover
110
User Guide
www.bull.com
Upgrading Microprocessor
The server may have another CPU installed in addition to the standard CPU (Intel Xeon
Processor).
Caution
■ The CPU is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make
sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge
static electricity from your body before handling the CPU. Do
not touch the CPU pins by a bare hand or place the CPU
directly on the desk. For static notes, see “Static Precautions” on page 103.
■ Do not operate the system until checking that the additionally installed CPU is in normal state.
■ Make sure to use the CPU authorized by Bull. Installing a
third-party CPU may cause a failure of the CPU as well as
the server. Repair of the server due to failures or damage
resulted from installing such a board will be charged.
A
B
D
C
Figure 34: Processor Slots
A: Front Side
B: Rear Side
C: Processor #1
D: Processor #2
111
User Guide
www.bull.com
Note: If the different revision of the processor is installed in
the multiprocessor system, Windows logs the following
information every startup. If this message is logged, it is no
problem for operation.
112
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installation
Take the following steps to install the CPU.
1. See the section “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 105 to prepare.
2. Pull out the server from the rack.
3. Remove the logic cover and drive cover. See “Drive Cover” on page 108 and
“Logic Cover” on page 110.
4. Remove the PCI riser module. See “Installing and Removing a PCI Board” on
page 132.
5. Remove two screws securing the support arm.
6. Remove the support arm from the chassis.
Figure 35: Removing the Support Arm
Note: Loosen the screws when the support arm comes up.
Press firmly the support arm before removing the screws.
7. Remove the processor duct from the chassis.
Figure 36: Removing the Processor Air Duct
8. Locate the CPU socket which you are going to install CPU.
113
User Guide
www.bull.com
9. Remove the protective socket cover from the load plate.
Caution
Do not discard the protective socket cover. Always replace the
socket cover if the processor is removed from the socket.
Figure 37: Removing the Protective Socket Cover
10. Open the socket lever by pushing the lever down and away from the socket.
Figure 38: Unlocking the Socket
11. Lift The Load Plate.
Figure 39: Lifting the Load Plate
Caution
Do not touch the socket contacts.
114
User Guide
www.bull.com
12. Remove the processor from the protective cover.
Caution
■ Hold the processor only at the edges, being careful not to
touch the bottom of the processor.
■ Do not discard the protective processor cover.
■ Always replace the processor cover if the processor is
removed from the socket.
13. Hold the processor with your thumb and index fingers oriented as shown in the
figure below.
Caution
Make sure fingers align to the socket cutouts.
A
B
C
Figure 40: Holding the processor
A: Pin Marker
B: Notches
C: Key
115
User Guide
www.bull.com
14. Align notches with the socket.
15. Lower the processor straight down without tilting or sliding it in the socket.
16. While pressing down on the load plate, close and engage the socket lever.
Figure 41: Socket Lever
17. Put the heat sink on CPU and fix the heat sink with four screws.
2
3
4
1
Figure 42: Securing the Heatsink
Note: Take care of the direction of the heat sink (see figure
below)..
116
User Guide
www.bull.com
18. Make sure that the heat sink is level.
Notes:
■ If the heat sink is not level, remove it, and then install it
again. The following probably causes the heat sink not to be
level:
- –The CPU is not positioned correctly.
- –All screws are not completely tightened.
■ Do not move the secured heat sink.
19. Install the processor air duct.
A
B
Figure 43: Installing the CPU Air Duct
A: Processor Duct
B: USB Cable
Note: Place the internal USB cable onto the processor duct
(see figure above).
20. Reinstall the support arm.
A
B
Figure 44: Reinstalling the Support Arm
A: USB cable
117
User Guide
www.bull.com
B: Support Arm
Notes:
■ Make sure the support arm holds the processor duct firmly
(see figure below)
■ Loosen the screws when the support arm comes up. Press
firmly the support arm before removing the screws.
21. Install the covers you removed previously.
22. Power on the server, start the SETUP utility, and set "Processor Retest" of
"Processor Settings" on the Main menu to "Enable".
23. Set "Reset Configuration Data" on the Advanced menu to "Yes".
This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See “BIOS
Setup Utility” on page 68 for details.
24. Verify that POST displays no error messages.
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the
POST error messages listed in “POST Error Messages” on page 199.
25. To add one CPU to the server in 1-CPU configuration to operate the server
with more than one CPU, change the driver of [Computer] in the device
manager to [ACPI multi-processor PC] and then update the system.
118
User Guide
www.bull.com
Removal
To remove the CPU, prepare the removal referring to steps 1 and 12 in the installation
procedure and do the reverse procedure of steps 17 to 9.
Caution
■ Do not remove any CPU unless it is failed.
■ After the operation, heat may make the cool seat at the bottom of the heat sink adhere to the CPU. To remove the heat
sink from the CPU, first turn the heat sink to the left and right
slightly to make sure that the heat sink can be apart from the
CPU. Removing the heat sink with it adhering to the CPU
may cause the CPU and/or socket to be defected.
Figure 45: Removing the Heat Sink
Do the following procedure if a CPU is removed (or replaced).
1. Start BIOS Setup to select menus "Main" – "Processor Settings" – "Processor
Retest" in the order to clear the error information on the removed CPU (see
“BIOS Setup Utility” on page 68).
When a CPU is replaced, select menus "Main" – "Processor Settings" to check
that the ID and L2 Cache of the additional CPU are defined normally (see
“BIOS Setup Utility” on page 68).
2. Set "Reset Configuration Data" on the Advanced menu to "Yes."
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See “BIOS
Setup Utility” on page 68 for details.
119
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installing or Removing Random Access Memory
Install the additional DIMM (Dual Inline Memory Module) to the DIMM socket on the
mother board in the server. The mother board is provided with twelve DIMM board
slots.
Note: Up to 48 GB of memory (4 GB DIMM x 12) can be
installed.
Caution
■ The DIMM is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make
sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge
static electricity from your body before handling the DIMM.
Do not touch the DIMM terminals or on-board parts by a
bare hand or place the DIMM directly on the desk. For static
notes, see “Static Precautions” on page 103.
■ Make sure to use the DIMM authorized by Bull. Installing a
third-party DIMM may cause a failure of the DIMM as well as
the server. Repair of the server due to failures or damage
resulted from installing such a board will be charged.
120
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installation Order
DIMMs must be populated in pairs and in the following order:
Group #1, #2, #3, #4, #5 and #6.
DIMM #41
DIMM #42
DIMM #43
DIMM #11
DIMM #12
DIMM #13
DIMM #21
DIMM #22
DIMM #23
DIMM #31
DIMM #32
DIMM #33
Order
Group
Sockets N°
1
1
#11 and #21
2
2
#31 and #41
3
3
#12 and #22
4
4
#32 and #42
5
5
#13 and #23
6
6
#33 and #43
Figure 46: Locating the DIMM Sockets
Caution
■ Install matched pairs of DIMMs equal in speed and size.
■ Refer to “Using the Memory RAS Features” on page 126 to
configure the memory mirrorins and online sare memory features.
Installation
Install a DIMM as described in the following procedure.
Caution
The server supports only low-profile DIMMs (30 mm (1.2
inches) in height). It does not support DIMMs exceeding the
specified height.
121
User Guide
www.bull.com
1. See the section “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 105 to prepare.
2. Pull out the server from the rack.
3. Remove the logic cover and drive cover. See “Drive Cover” on page 108 and
“Logic Cover” on page 110.
4. Remove the PCI riser module. See “Installing and Removing a PCI Board” on
page 132.
5. Remove the two screws securing the support arm.
6. Remove the support arm from the chassis.
Figure 47: Removing the Support Arm
Note: Loosen the screws when the support arm comes up.
Press firmly on the support arm to remove the screws.
7. Remove the processor duct from the chassis.
Figure 48: Removing the Processor Duct
122
User Guide
www.bull.com
8. Locate the DIMM socket of your choice and make sure the clips at both ends of
the socket are pushed outwards to the open position.
9. Push the DIMM straight into the socket.
Note: Make sure of the orientation of the DIMM.
Position the DIMM so that a notch in the bottom edge of the
DIMM aligns with the keyed socket. Applying too much
pressure can damage the socket. Keyed DIMMs insert only one
way.
Caution
To avoid damaging the socket, do not apply excessive force
while pressing the DIMM.
The levers automatically close when the DIMM is inserted into the socket.
A
B
Figure 49: Inserting the DIMM in the Socket
A: Key Slot
B: Key
10. Reinstall the support arm.
A
B
Figure 50: Reinstalling the Support Arm
123
User Guide
www.bull.com
A: USB cable
B: Support Arm
Notes:
■ Make sure the support arm holds the processor duct firmly
(see figure below).
■ When the support arm comes up, you may lose the screws.
Press firmly the support arm before tightening the screws.
A
B
Figure 51: Support Arm (Detail)
A: Support Arm
B: Processor Duct
11. Install the components you removed in steps 3 to 7.
12. Power on the server and verify that POST displays no error messages.
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the
POST error messages listed in “POST Error Messages” on page 199.
13. Start the SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] to verify
that the installed DIMM shows the status "Normal". (See “BIOS Setup Utility”
on page 68 or details.)
14. Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the [Advanced] menu.
This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See “BIOS
Setup Utility” on page 68 for details.
15. If the Windows operating system is in use, set the paging file size to the
recommended value (total memory size × 1.5) or a greater value.
Removal
Remove the DIMM according to the following procedure.
124
User Guide
www.bull.com
Notes:
■ To remove the failed DIMM, check the error message
appearing in POST or NEC ESMPRO to identify the DIMM
socket (group) in which the failed DIMM is installed.
■ The server operates only when at least two DIMMs are
installed.
1. See the section “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 105 to prepare.
2. Pull out the server from the rack.
3. Remove the logic cover and drive cover. See “Drive Cover” on page 108 and
“Logic Cover” on page 110.
4. Remove the PCI riser module. See “Installing and Removing a PCI Board” on
page 132.
5. Remove the two screws securing the support arm.
6. Remove the support arm from the chassis.
Figure 52: Removing the Support Arm
Note: Loosen the screws when the support arm comes up.
Press firmly on the support arm to remove the screws.
7. Remove the processor duct from the chassis.
Figure 53: Removing the Processor Duct
125
User Guide
www.bull.com
8. Open the levers at both sides of the socket from which you remove the DIMM.
The DIMM is unlock and ready for removal.
Figure 54: Removing the DIMM from the Socket
9. Hold the DIMM by the edges, lift it away from the socket, and store it in a antistatic package.
10. Install the components you removed in steps 3 to 7.
11. Power on the server and verify that POST displays no error messages.
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the
POST error messages listed in “POST Error Messages” on page 199.
12. Start the SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] →
[Memory Retest] → [Enabled] to clear the error information of the removed
DIMM. (See “BIOS Setup Utility” on page 68 for details.)
13. Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the Advanced menu.
This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See “BIOS
Setup Utility” on page 68 for details.
Using the Memory RAS Features
The server has the memory mirroring and online spare memory features as well as the
chipkill ECC memory feature, which can automatically correct a memory error (multibit error) causing system shutdown.
Caution
The memory mirroring and online spare memory features are
not available in the normal memory configuration. (The chipkill
ECC memory feature can operate in any configuration.)
126
User Guide
www.bull.com
The memory area on the motherboard of the server is divided into two memory
branches as shown in the figure below.
A
B
D
C
#11
#21
#31
#41
#1
#2
#12
#22
#32
#42
#3
#4
#13
#23
#33
#43
#5
#6
Figure 55: Memory Branches
A: Motherboard
B: Memory Controller
C: Memory Branch #1
D: Memory Branch #2
The memory mirroring and online spare memory features keep memory redundancy
between memory branches and within a memory branch by monitoring or altering
memory active/inactive status, respectively.
127
User Guide
www.bull.com
Memory Mirroring
The memory mirroring feature writes the same data into two groups of DIMMs
corresponding with each other between memory branches (mirror set) to provide data
redundancy.
A
B
D
C
Gr oup#1
#1
Group#2
#2
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
E
E
E
Figure 56: Memory Mirroring
A: Motherboard
B: Memory Controller
C: Branch #0
D: Branch #1
E: Mirroring Pairs
Note: The operating system only recognizes half of the total
physical capacity.
The memory mirroring feature can be used under the following conditions:
■ Install memory devices on four memory sockets configuring a mirror set.
■ All the installed memory devices should have the same capacity.
■ Run SETUP, change the parameters appropriately in the [Mirror] menu selected as
shown below, save the settings and exit from SETUP.
[Advanced], [Memory Configuration], [Memory RAS Feature], [Mirror]
■ Install memory devices in the following order:
Groups 1 and 2, Groups 3 and 4, Groups 5 and 6
The following mirroring cannot be configured:
■ Memory mirroring between different mirror sets.
128
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ Memory mirroring within a specific memory branch.
The table below lists examples of DIMM installation patterns enabling the memory
mirroring feature to be used.
Example
Memory Set
(Group #)
Memory Set
(Group #)
Memory Set
(Group #)
Capacity
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
Physical
Logical
1
2GB
2GB
-
-
-
-
4GB
2GB
2
2GB
2GB
1GB
1GB
-
-
6GB
3GB
3
2GB
2GB
2GB
2GB
-
-
8GB
4GB
4
2GB
2GB
1GB
1GB
1GB
1GB
8GB
4GB
5
2GB
2GB
1GB
1GB
2GB
2GB
10GB
5GB
6
2GB
2GB
2GB
2GB
1GB
1GB
10GB
5GB
7
2GB
2GB
4GB
4GB
4GB
4GB
12GB
6GB
8
2GB
2GB
2GB
2GB
2GB
2GB
12GB
6GB
9
2GB
2GB
1GB
1GB
4GB
4GB
14GB
7GB
10
2GB
2GB
4GB
4GB
1GB
1GB
14GB
7GB
11
2GB
2GB
2GB
2GB
4GB
4GB
16GB
8GB
12
2GB
2GB
4GB
4GB
2GB
2GB
16GB
8GB
13
2GB
2GB
4GB
4GB
4GB
4GB
20GB
10GB
14
4GB
4GB
4GB
4GB
4GB
4GB
24GB
12GB
15
8GB
8GB
8GB
8GB
8GB
8GB
48GB
24GB
129
User Guide
www.bull.com
Online Spare Memory
The online memory spare feature puts a group of memory devices within a memory
branch into standby status as spare devices. If an unrecoverable error occurs in a
DIMM of the running group, the feature automatically changes the running DIMM
from the failed one to a DIMM in the standby group to continue the processing.
A
B
D
C
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
E
F
Figure 57: Online Spare Memory
A: Motherboard
B: Memory Controller
C: Branch #0
D: Branch #1
E: In Operation
F: Standbys
Note: The operating system recognizes the memory
devices as those with capacities less than the actual physical
capacities. (The recognized capacities vary depending on the
number of DIMMs and the physical capacity per DIMM.)
The online spare memory feature can be used under the following conditions:
■ Install memory devices to more than one group in each memory branch. The server
can operate even if the memory branches are different in the number of DIMMs.
For example, no error occurs if memory branches 0 and 1 include four DIMMs (or
two groups) and six DIMMs (or three groups), respectively.
130
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ DIMMs installed in a specific memory branch should have the same capacity. The
server operates properly as long as DIMMs of the same capacity are installed in
each memory branch. (For example, the server can operate if the total capacity of
memory branch 0 is different from that of memory branch 1.)
■ Run SETUP, change the parameters appropriately in the [Sparing] menu selected
as shown below, save the settings and exit from SETUP.
[Advanced], [Memory Configuration], [Sparing]
■ Install memory devices in the following order:
Group 1, Group 3, Group 5 for memory branch 0
Group 2, Group 4, Group 6 for memory branch 1
The following sparing can be neither configured nor set.
■ Sparing to another memory branch.
■ Specification of arbitrary memory devices as spare. The group of the largest
number within a specific memory branch can be specified as spare.
The table below lists examples of DIMM installation patterns enabling the online spare
memory feature to be used. While the following patterns are provided for memory
branch 0, the same patterns can also be adapted to memory branch 1.
Example
Memory Blanch #0
Capacity
(Group #)
#1
#3
#5
Physical
Logical
1
1GB
1GB
-
2GB
1GB
2
1GB
1GB
1GB
3GB
2GB
3
2GB
2GB
-
4GB
3GB
4
2GB
2GB
2GB
6GB
5GB
5
4GB
4GB
-
8GB
6GB
6
4GB
4GB
4GB
12GB
10GB
7
8GB
8GB
-
16GB
12GB
8
8GB
8GB
8GB
24GB
20GB
Depending on the specification of the memory controller, the spare memory is set in
units of rank memory.
The logical memory capacity of single rank memory differs from that of dual rank
memory when online spare memory is specified.
■ Single rank memory configuration
Logical memory capacity = (Physical memory capacity * Number of DIMMs) –
(Physical memory capacity)
■ Dual rank memory configuration
Logical memory capacity = (Physical memory capacity * Number of DIMMs) –
(Physical memory capacity / 2)
131
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installing and Removing a PCI Board
The server has two "riser cards" on the mother board that enable installation of PCI
boards. Three PCI boards can be installed on each riser card. (Up to six PCI boards can
be installed in total.)
Insert PCI boards for network extension and file device function extension into PCI
board slots in each riser card.
Caution
■ The PCI board is extremely sensitive to static electricity.
Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the
PCI board. Do not touch the PCI board terminals or onboard parts by a bare hand or place the PCI board directly
on the desk. For static notes, see “Static Precautions” on
page 103.
■ Some restrictions are imposed on the combination of PCI
boards which can be installed in the server. Contact your
sales agent for details.
■ A riser card is designed for installing only low-profile PCI
boards or full-height PCI boards. Before installing a PCI
board, make sure of the card specification.
■ Disable the option ROM (such as the BIOS utility startup) for
the PCI slot if the SCSI controller, disk array controller, LAN
board (network booting) or FibreChannel controller has no
hard disk drive containing an OS connected. For more information, see “BIOS Setup Utility” on page 68.
A
B
C
D
Figure 58: Motherboard Riser Cards
A: Motherboard Front Side
B: Motherboard Rear Side
C: Riser card slot for full-height PCI boards
132
User Guide
www.bull.com
D: Riser card slot for low-profile PCI boards
3C
3B
2C
2B
1C
1B
Figure 59: Locating the Riser Cards and PCI Slots
Notes: Observe the following notes on installing/removing a PCI
board:
■ Do not touch the terminals of the riser cards and the leads of
electronic components with your bare hand. Fingerprints and
dust left on them cause the server to malfunction due to a
connection failure or damage to the leads.
■ A riser card is designed for installing only low-profile PCI
boards or full-height PCI boards. Before installing a PCI
board, make sure of the card specification.
■ The motherboard is not equipped with a connector for a LED
relay cable.
■ The system usually searches for the PCI board in the following order:
PCI Slot 3B → 1B → 2B → 1C → 3C → 2C
When the Riser Card (PCI-X 2U) is installed:
PCI Slot 3B → 2B → 1B → 1C → 3C → 2C
■ The PCI devices of the same type (including onboard PCI
device) may be recognized in different order from that
described above, depending on OS or disk array BIOS utility. Check the slot location of PCI device by PCI bus number,
device number and function number shown in the table
below.
Onboard NIC1
Bus number
Device number
Function number
C
0
0
Onboard NIC2
C
0
1
Onboard SAS
D
5
0
Slot 1C
18
0
X
Slot 2C
20
0
X
Slot 3C
1C
0
X
Slot 1B
0D*
3
X
Slot 2B
0D*
9
X
Slot 3B
3*
0
X
*
On certain PCI devices, other bus numbers may be assigned.
■ Set "Disabled" for the optional ROM of a LAN device not to
be booted by using the BIOS SETUP utility.
133
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ If an additional LAN device is installed in slot 3C or 3B, it is
hard to push the catch of the connector with your finger that
is connected to the LAN port. Disconnect the connector
pushing the catch with a standard screwdriver. At this time,
be very careful for the screwdriver not to damage the LAN
port or other ports.
■ If a bootable PCI board (e.g., a disk array controller, SCSI
controller, or LAN card) is additionally installed, the boot priority is changed to the default. After the additional installation, start the BIOS SETUP utility, select [Boot] → [Boot
Device Priority], and set the new boot priority.
■ If an option operating with only 33 MHz is installed in one of
the slots (1C, 2C, and 3C, or 1B, 2B, and 3B) on a PCI riser
card, the options installed in the other slots of the same riser
card are subjected to operation with only 33 MHz.
■ Contact your service representative for the acceptable
optional PCI board.
134
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installation
Take the following steps to install a PCI board on the riser card:
Caution
■ Each riser card supports low-profile or full-height PCI
boards. Before installing a PCI board, check the type of the
PCI board.
■ When installing a PCI board, check that the card connector
matches the connector of the riser card.
1.
2.
3.
4.
See the section “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 105 to prepare.
Pull out the server from the rack.
Remove the logic cover.
Lift straight up and remove the riser card assembly from the server.
Figure 60: Removing the Riser Card Assembly
5. Remove a screw securing an expansion slot cover.
Low-profile type
Full-height type
135
User Guide
www.bull.com
6. Remove the extension slot cover.
Note: Keep the removed extension slot cover for future use.
Low-profile type
Full-height type
Figure 61: Removing an Extension Slot Cover
7. This step is only required for a PCI board of the full-height/full-length type.
Before installing a PCI board of the full-height/full-length type, remove the
retainer (A in figure below) from the PCI board, and then unlock and open the
card retainer clip on the other side of the guide rail.
A
Figure 62: Removing the PCI Board Retainer
136
User Guide
www.bull.com
8. Install the PCI board on the riser card.
Align the PCI board terminal section with the riser card slot, and firmly push
the PCI board until it is fully seated.
B
A
Figure 63: Low-Profile (left) and Full-Height (right) PCI Cards
A: Top end of the PCI board bracket
B: Guide rails
Caution
■ Do not touch the terminals of the riser cards and PCI boards
with your bare hand. Fingerprints and dust left on them
cause the server to malfunction.
■ If you are unable to install a PCI board correctly, remove it,
and then install it again. Be careful not to apply excess force
to a PCI board or riser card. Doing so may damage the card.
Notes:
■ Check that the top end of the PCI board bracket is inserted
in the designated slot of the riser card.
■ If a full-height PCI board is installed, check that the PCI
board bracket and the edge of the opposite card are inserted
in the guide rails of the riser card.
137
User Guide
www.bull.com
9. Secure the board with a screw removed in Step 5.
Low-profile type
Full-height type
10. Securing the PCI Card with a Screw
11. Insert the riser card into the slot on the mother board.
Align the riser card terminal section with the slot on the mother board, and
firmly push the riser card until it is fully seated.
Figure 64: Installing the Riser card Assembly
12. After the insertion, press the riser card down with your fingers until it is fully
seated.
Figure 65: Fully Sating the Riser Card Assembly
138
User Guide
www.bull.com
13. Install the components you removed previously.
14. Verify that POST displays no error messages.
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the
POST error messages listed in “POST Error Messages” on page 199.
15. Select "Yes" for [Advanced] → [Reset Configuration Data].
This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See “BIOS
Setup Utility” on page 68 for details.
16. Start the BIOS configuration utility in the installed card, and set up the card.
Presence/absence of the utility and the start and operation methods depend on
the card. For details, see the manual provided with the card.
Removal
Remove a PCI board in reverse order of the installation steps.
139
User Guide
www.bull.com
Replacing the Battery
All motherboards use a battery to maintain system configuration information. If it fails
to maintain system configuration, replace it with an identical rated battery from the
same manufacturer.
Remove the battery from the motherboard as follows:
Caution
Removing the battery from the motherboard causes the computer to lose system configuration information. Before removing
it, run Setup and record the system configuration settings.
Use this information to restore the system after replacing the
battery.
1. Turn off and unplug the system unit and any external options connected to the
system.
2. Remove the cover. See “Removing and Replacing the Top Cover” on page 106
3. Locate the battery on the motherboard. See “System board Features” on
page 27
4. Use your finger to carefully remove the battery from the battery socket on the
motherboard.
Warning
The battery may explode if it is incorrectly replaced or improperly discarded.
Use only an identical rated battery from the same manufacturer.
5.
6.
7.
8.
With the positive (+) side facing up, press the new battery into the socket.
Replace the system unit cover.
Connect external peripherals and power cables.
Run Setup to reconfigure system parameters.
140
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installing or Removing a Hard Disk Drive
The server supports Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) hard disk drives.
Caution
■ Only install hard disks approved by your sales representative. Installing a third-party hard disk may cause failures of
both the server and the hard disk. Purchase hard disks of
the following models:
SAS drives
- 36.3 GB, 15,000 rpm, SAS
- 73.2 GB, 15,000 rpm, SAS
- 146 GB, 15,000 rpm, SAS
- 300 GB, 15,000 rpm, SAS
All six slots may contain a hard disk approximately 25.4 mm (1 inch) high. The SAS
Port numbers are always assigned to hard disks as shown below.
D
A
B
C
A
D
0
3
1
4
2
5
E
F
SAS Port 0
B
SAS Port 1
C
SAS Port 2
SAS Port 3
E
SAS Port 4
F
SAS Port 5
Figure 66: Hard Disk Drives SAS Port Numbers
Note: The disk identification numbers, allocated to the hard
disk drives by the RAID configuration software, vary between
card manufacturers. If you have any doubts, please use the disk
management software or the RAID controller BIOS to identify a
specific drive.
The hard disk drive bays are connected to the SAS connector on the motherboard when
the server is shipped.
141
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installation
Take the following steps to install a hard disk drive. This procedure applies to all the
hard disk drive bays.
Note: Any hard disk can be installed or removed in or from
the server only by removing the front bezel.
Caution
In the disk array configuration, use the hard disks having the
same specification including the capacity.
1. See “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 105 described earlier to
prepare.
2. Unlock the front bezel with the security key and remove the front bezel.
3. Locate the slot in which you are going to install a hard disk drive.
The server has six slots. Install hard disk drives in ascending order of the SAS
Port numbers. The SAS Port numbers assigned to the slots are all determined.
4. Unlock the lever of the hard disk drive carrier and open the handle.
Figure 67: Opening the Hard Disk Drive Carrier Lever
5. Fit a hard disk drive into the empty carrier, and secure it with two screws on
each side.
6. Align the drive carrier with the bay guide rail.
7. Slide the drive carrier into the bay until it locks with the backplane connector.
Caution
Push the hard disk drive carrier until the hook of the handle hits
the frame.
142
User Guide
www.bull.com
Caution
Hold the hard disk drive carrier with both hands securely and
carefully.
Hook
Figure 68: Sliding the Hard Disk Drive Carrier into the Bay
8. Close the lever ensuring the drive is secured.
The handle is locked when a distinct "click" is heard.
Caution
Be careful not to get your finger caught between the handle and
tray. Try to push the drive further to check that it is firmly
secured.
Note: Check that the handle is hooked to the frame when
the hard disk drive is inserted.
143
User Guide
www.bull.com
Figure 69: Locking the Hard Disk Drive Carrier Lever
9. Install the front bezel you removed in step 2.
There are tabs on the left side of the front bezel. Engage the tabs with the server
frame, install the front bezel, and lock it with the security key.
Removal
Take the following steps to remove a hard disk drive:
Note: If removing a failing hard disk drive, check the slot in
which the DISK lamp of the hard disk drive is amber before
starting the removal.
A
Hard disks lamps
A
Figure 70: Hard Disks Lamps
1. See “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 105 to prepare.
144
User Guide
www.bull.com
2. Unlock the front bezel with the security key, and remove the front bezel.
3. Push the lever to unlock, and put the handle down.
4. Firmly hold the handle and hard disk drive, and pull out the hard disk drive.
2
1
Figure 71: Sliding the Hard Disk Drive out of the Bay
5. Remove the screws (two on each side) securing the failing hard disk drive into
the carrier, remove the hard disk drive and and set it aside.
6. Align the empty drive carrier with the bay guide rail.
7. Slide the drive carrier into the bay until it locks with the backplane connector.
8. Install the front bezel you removed in step 2.
When the hard disks are in the disk array configuration, you can restore the state before
an error using the auto-rebuild feature that stores the data in the old hard disk into a
new one.
The auto-rebuild feature is available for the RAID1, RAID5, or RAID10 disk array
configuration.
Note: Onboard RAID controller (HostRAID) supports RAID
levels RAID0 and RAID1.
Auto-rebuild is carried out when you hot-swap a failed hard disk with a new one
(replace the disk while the server is powered). While auto-rebuild is in progress, the
DISK lamp flashes green and amber alternatively to indicate it.
Caution
■ When auto-rebuild fails, the DISK lamp lights in amber.
Remove and install the hard disk again to restart autorebuild.
■ If the disk array monitoring utility is installed, it may display
or act as follows. If the DISK lamp does not light in amber
after auto-rebuild, however, auto-rebuild has completed successfully.
145
User Guide
www.bull.com
- –Displays "Rebuild was cancelled" on the screen while
auto-rebuild is in progress.
- –Appears to stop and restart auto-rebuild.
Observe the following notes for auto-rebuild.
■ Do not power off the server in the period between a hard disk error and completion
of auto-rebuild.
■ When you removed a hard disk, wait at least 90 seconds before installing the hard
disk back again.
■ Do not replace another hard disk while rebuilding is in progress. (The DISK lamp
flashes in green and amber alternatively while rebuilding the hard disk.)
146
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installing and Removing a Power Supply Unit
Your server contains one or two power supplies.
The second power supply is optional and provides a redundant configuration that
ensures continued operation of the system in the unlikely event one of the power
supplies fails.
Installation
Take the following steps to install a power supply unit:
1. See “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 105.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power. Failure to do so causes the server
to malfunction or fail.
2. Pull the cable arm toward the rear of the server, and check the slot for installing
an optional power supply unit.
3. Hold and pull the lever of the blank cover and remove the blank cover.
Figure 72: Removing the PSU Slot Blank Cover
Note: Keep the removed blank cover for future use.
147
User Guide
www.bull.com
4. Insert the power supply unit.
Figure 73: Inserting the Power Supply Unit
Caution
Do not touch the contacts (A in figure below) of the power supply unit.
A
A
Gold-plated contacts
Figure 74: Power Supply Unit Contacts
148
User Guide
www.bull.com
5. Grasp the handle and firmly push the power supply.
The power supply unit is locked when a distinct "click" is heard.
Figure 75: Locking the Power Supply Unit
6. Connect two power cords.
Use the power cords provided with the system. The AC power lamps flash
when the power cords are connected.
B
A
C
E
A
B
C
D
E
D
Power supply unit 1 (standard)
Power supply unit 2 (option)
Power cord for power supply unit 1
Power cord for power supply unit 2
AC power lamps
Figure 76: Connecting the Power Cords
7. Power on the server.
The AC power lamps light on.
8. Check, by the Status lamp or on the POST screen, that there are no errors
related to the power supply units.
See “POST Error Messages” on page 199 for details on the error messages.
If the AC power lamps are off, reinstall the power supply units. If the same
error message still appears, contact your sales representative.
149
User Guide
www.bull.com
Replacing a Failing Power Supply Unit
Caution
Do not remove a power supply unit operating normally.
Note:
■ If one power supply unit fails while the server contains two
power supply units in a redundant configuration, the failing
power supply unit can be replaced with the system operating
(power-on state). (Skip step 2.)
■ In configuration of two power units, AC power may be supplied only to a single power unit through the power cord connected to the power unit. If so, the power lamp on the other
power unit (to which a power cord is not connected) blinks
amber. When a power cord is connected to the power unit to
supply AC power, the lamp changes to blink green. If the
lamp still blinks amber, contact your service representative
to ask maintenance.
1. Locate the failing power supply unit by the AC power lamp on the rear of each
power supply unit. (The lamp of the failing power supply unit is amber.)
2. Shutdown the system, and press the power switch to turn off the power.
3. Disconnect the power cord from the failed power supply.
4. Hold the handle of the failing power supply.
5. While pressing the lever, pull the power supply to remove it from the chassis.
1
2
Figure 77: Pulling the Power Supply Unit out of the Chassis
150
User Guide
www.bull.com
6. If operating the server with a single power supply unit without installing a new
one, install the cover you removed in step 3 of installation procedure.
Caution
To maintain the cooling effect in the server, install the blank
cover in the vacant slot.
7. Install the new power supply unit taking steps 4 to 8 of "Installation", and
check that the power supply unit is installed normally.
Note: If one of the two power supply units of the server is
replaced while the power is on, the POWER lamp of the new
power supply unit goes on. (If it is replaced while the power is
off, the lamp flashes. The lamp goes on when the power is
turned on.)
151
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installing and Removing a Disk Array Controller
Board
The disk array controller board is an optional PCI board provided to improve data
reliability.
Installing the disk array controller board allows you to use hard disks in the device bays
of the server and those in the optional expansion disk cabinet in the disk array
configuration.
Caution
■ The disk array controller board is extremely sensitive to
static electricity. Make sure to touch the metal frame of the
Server to discharge static electricity from your body before
handling the disk array controller board. Do not touch the
disk array controller board terminals or on-board parts by a
bare hand or place the disk array controller board directly on
the desk. For static notes, see “Static Precautions” on
page 103.
■ Making hard disks in the disk array configuration or changing
the RAID level initializes hard disks. If the hard disk to be
configured in the array has your valuable data stored, make
sure to make a backup copy of the data before installing the
disk array controller board and configuring the array.
■ The disk array configuration requires at least two hard disks.
■ Use hard disks of the same capacity and performance (e.g.,
revolution) for each pack to configure them in the array.
Notes:
■ Before installing a disk array controller board, start the
SETUP utility, select [Advanced] → [PCI Configuration], and
check that [Enabled] is set for the parameter [PCI Slot xx
ROM] (xx: PCI slot number).
■ Your motherboard includes an onboard RAID controller supporting RAID 0 and RAID 1.
■ A disk array configuration of RAID1 or RAID5 increases disk
reliability. However, the actually available capacity becomes
smaller than the total hard disk capacity in the disk array
configuration.
152
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installation
See “Installing and Removing a PCI Board” on page 132 or refer to any additional
specific manuals for the installation of a disk array controller.
Removal
Remove a disk array controller board in reverse order of the installation steps.
Use of internal hard disk drives in a disk array configuration
This subsection describes how to configure the internal hard disk drives installed in
your system to the RAID drives.
Onboard RAID Controller (RoMB)
A RAID controller is factory embedded on your motherboard.
To enable the onboard RAID controller, use the RAID configuration jumper on the
motherboard as shown below. After changing the jumper setting, run the RAID
configuration utility to configure the RAID system.
■ Jumper in position 1-2: The RAID controller is disabled.
■ Jumper in position 2-3: The RAID controller is enabled.
Figure 78: RAID Configuration Jumper
Optional RAID Controller
Your server can include an optional PCI add-in RAID controller. The optional RAID
controller can control the internal hard disk drives as the RAID drive.
153
User Guide
www.bull.com
To use the internal SAS hard disk drives in a disk array configuration with an optional
RAID controller, reconnect the cable on the motherboard (excluding the zero-channel
MegaRAIDSAS 8300XL RAID card). At the factory, the internal SAS cable is
connected to the SAS interface connectors on the motherboard as shown below.
B
A
Figure 79: SAS Connectors
A: SAS Connector 1 (for ports 0 to 2)
B: SAS Connector 2 (for ports 3 to 5)
Change the SAS cable connection as described in the following procedures.
1. Remove the end of the SAS interface cable that is plugged into the SAS
connectors on the motherboard.
2. Reinstall the end of the SAS interface cable just removed into the connector on
the RAID controller.
A
B
Figure 80: Rerouting the Cable Connection
A: Optional RAID Controller
B: To the backplane
154
User Guide
www.bull.com
3. Replace the parts and covers, plug in the system power cord, and turn on the
system to run the RAID utility (refer to the manual that comes with the
optional RAID controller).
Notes on Using the LSILogic MegaRAID SAS 8408E disk
array controller (internal SAS HDD)
■ Pay attention to connect the interface cable to proper cable
connectors P2 and P3. Otherwise, the SAS port number for
hard disk drive may not be displayed correctly (see figure
below).
■ Connect the cables to the disk array controller before installing the PCI riser module assembly to the chassis.
Observe the following notes on configuring a disk array:
- The hard disk drives installed must feature the same capacity and rotational
speed. (The minimum number of required disks depends on the configuration of
RAID (Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive [Independent] Disks).)
- Select/set a RAID level "RAID0", "RAID1", or "RAID5" (optional RAID controller only) of disk array configuration.
When installing a system in an internal hard disk, you should use "Express Setup"
to perform all the procedures for RAID configuration, OS installation, and then OS
setup.
Use Express Setup even when not installing a system. Start Express Setup, select
[OS Selection] → [Others]. The installer automatically performs all the procedures
for RAID configuration, maintenance partition setting, and then maintenance
utility installation.
When making the setup in manual mode, use the RAID configuration utility in the
chip on the board. You can start the utility during execution of POST that
automatically starts immediately after you turn on the server power switch. For
details, see the online document in the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM provided with the
server. (The utility varies depending on the disk array controller board.) For details
on the data transfer rate, RAID, and array configuration, see the manual provided
with the disk array controller board as well as the online document.
155
User Guide
www.bull.com
Use of a disk expansion unit in a disk array configuration
A disk expansion unit is an exclusive device that can install up to 14 hard disk drives.
(The number of hard disk drives depends on the model.) The server containing a disk
array controller board can connect one or two of these devices. For details on the
number of devices connected, see the manuals provided with the disk array controller
and disk expansion unit.
Caution
A disk expansion unit is provided with no hard disk drives. You
need to purchase hard disk drives separately.
An optional cable may be required to connect with a disk expansion unit. Refer to the
manual coming with the disk expansion unit for details.
After connecting the disk expansion unit, use the RAID configuration utility in the chip
on the board to set the disk expansion unit in a disk array configuration (RAID0,
RAID1, or RAID5). (The utility varies depending on the board.) For details on settings
and the setting methods, see the online document in the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM
provided with the server or the manual provided with the board.
While a disk expansion unit is set in a disk array configuration, you can use the "Auto
Rebuild" feature of the disk array controller to restore data if one of the hard disk drives
installed in the disk expansion unit fails. (Replace the failing hard disk drive while the
power is on. (Hot swapping))
156
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installing and Removing a Backup Device
The server has one slot for installing a backup device such as a magnetic tape drive.
Caution
■ A SCSI cable and a PCI SCSI controller card are necessary
to install a SCSI backup device.
■ Set "OFF" for the terminating resistor of the backup device
you are going to install, and set a SCSI ID different from
those of other devices. For the settings, see the manual provided with the server.
■ Install only a backup device specified by Bull.
■ The size of a backup device which can be installed in this
server is as follows:
Width: Up to about 9 cm (3.5 inches)
Height: Up to about 4 cm (1.6 inches)
0
3
1
4
2
5
A
Figure 81: Backup Device Slot
A: Backup device
Installation (IDE File Devices)
1.
2.
3.
4.
See the section “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 105.
Pull out the server from the rack.
Remove the drive cover. See “Drive Cover” on page 108.
While pulling the lever toward the right side of the server, pull the DVD-ROM
drive out of the chassis.
Figure 82: Removing the Optical Disk Drive
157
User Guide
www.bull.com
5. While pushing the latching tab that secures the device bay, push the device
carrier out of front of the server.
Figure 83: Unlocking the Backup Device Carrier
Caution
Be careful not to bend the latching tab by applying excess force.
If the tab bends, straighten it out as it was.
6. Take out the device carrier from the front of the server.
Figure 84: Taking the Backup Device Carrier out of the Chassis
7. Push the tabs at both ends of the front panel.
Figure 85: Unlocking the Backup Device Carrier Front Panel
158
User Guide
www.bull.com
8. Remove the front panel.
Figure 86: Removing the Backup Device Carrier Front Panel
Note: Keep the removed front panel for future use.
9. Insert the backup device into the device carrier.
Figure 87: Inserting the Backup Device into the Device Carrier
10. Secure the backup device with the provided screws.
Tighten two screws on each side.
A
Figure 88: Securing the Backup Device with Screws
A: Screw hole not used
159
User Guide
www.bull.com
Notes:
■ Be sure to use the screws provided with the backup device.
■ Position the backup device so that the device screw holes
align with the screw holes in the device carrier.
■ If you find it difficult to connect the cable of a long device,
slide the device to the front in order to connect the cable.
11. Connect the power cable and interface cable to the device.
A
B
Figure 89: Connecting the Cables to the Backup Device
A: Power cable
B: IDE cable
12. Insert the device carrier into the backup device bay halfway.
Push the device carrier as far as it will go. It is locked when a "click" is heard.
Figure 90: Locking the Backup Device Carrier
Note: Be careful not to damage the connected power cable
when inserting the device carrier.
160
User Guide
www.bull.com
13. Connect the interface cable and power cable to the backplane as shown in
figure below.
Figure 91: Connecting the Cables to the Backplane
14. Insert the device carrier into the device bay until it locks.
15. Install the components you removed previously.
16. Install the device driver.
Refer to the manual that comes with the device.
Installation (SCSI File Devices)
1. See the section “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 105.
2. Pull out the server from the rack.
3. Remove the logic cover and drive cover. See “Drive Cover” on page 108 and
“Logic Cover” on page 110.
4. Remove the PCI riser module. See “Installing and Removing a PCI Board” on
page 132.
5. Remove two screws securing the support arm.
6. Remove the support arm from the chassis.
Figure 92: Removing the Support Arm
Note: Loosen the screws when the support arm comes up.
Press firmly the support arm before removing the screws.
161
User Guide
www.bull.com
7. Remove the processor duct from the chassis.
Figure 93: Removing the Processor Air Duct
8. While pulling the lever toward the right side of the server, pull the DVD-ROM
drive out of the chassis.
Figure 94: Removing the Optical Disk Drive
9. While pushing the latching tab that secures the device bay, push the device
carrier out of front of the server.
Figure 95: Unlocking the Backup Device Carrier
Caution
Be careful not to bend the latching tab by applying excess force.
If the tab bends, straighten it out as it was.
162
User Guide
www.bull.com
10. Take out the device carrier from the front of the server.
Figure 96: Taking the Backup Device Carrier out of the Chassis
11. Push the tabs at both ends of the front panel.
Figure 97: Unlocking the Backup Device Carrier Front Panel
12. Remove the front panel.
Figure 98: Removing the Backup Device Carrier Front Panel
Note: Keep the removed front panel for future use.
163
User Guide
www.bull.com
13. Insert the backup device into the device carrier.
Figure 99: Inserting the Backup Device into the Device Carrier
14. Secure the backup device with the provided screws.
Tighten two screws on each side.
A
Figure 100: Securing the Backup Device with Screws
A: Screw hole not used
Notes:
■ Be sure to use the screws provided with the backup device.
■ Position the backup device so that the device screw holes
align with the screw holes in the device carrier.
■ If you find it difficult to connect the cable of a long device,
slide the device to the front in order to connect the cable.
164
User Guide
www.bull.com
15. Connect the power cable and interface cable to the device.
A
B
C
Figure 101: Connecting the Cables to the Backup Device
A: Power cable (attached)
B: SCSI terminator
C: SCSI cable (option)
16. Insert the SCSI cable into the server from the front of the server.
Figure 102: Inserting the SCSI Cable
17. Insert the device carrier into the backup device bay halfway.
Push the device carrier as far as it will go. It is locked when a "click" is heard.
Figure 103: Locking the Backup Device Carrier
165
User Guide
www.bull.com
Note: Be careful not to damage the connected power cable
when inserting the device carrier.
18. Connect the interface cable and power cable to the backplane as shown in
figure below.
Figure 104: Connecting the Cables to the Backplane
166
User Guide
www.bull.com
Note: Place the terminator at the end of the SCSI cable in
the device bay. At this time, also confirm that the SCSI cable is
not in contact with the latching tab of the device carrier. This
prevents the cable from being damaged.
A
B
D
C
Figure 105: SCSI Cable and Terminator Placement
A: SCSI terminator
B: IDE connector
C: Latching tab
D: SCSI cable
19. Insert the device carrier into the device bay until it locks.
20. Route the SCSI cable as shown in figure below.
A
Figure 106: Routing the SCSI Cable
167
User Guide
www.bull.com
A: SCSI cable
21. Install the optional SCSI controller to the PCI riser card.
22. Connect the SCSI cable to the SCSI connector on the SCSI controller.
A
B
C
Figure 107: Connecting the SCSI Cable to the SCSI Controller
A: SCSI Cable
B: SCSI Controller
C: PCI Riser Card
23. Install the components you removed previously.
24. Install the device driver.
Refer to the manual that comes with the device.
Removal
Remove the backup device in reverse order of the installation steps.
168
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installing and Removing a Redundant HotSwap Fan
Your server can include four optional redundant hot-swap fans.
#5
#1
#6
#2
#7
#3
#8
#4
Figure 108: System Fans
Standard: #1, #2, #3, #4
Optional: #5, #6, #7, #8
Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
See the section “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 105.
Pull out the server from the rack.
Remove the drive cover. See “Drive Cover” on page 108.
Locate the installation slot of your choice.
Insert the hot-swap fan into the slot with its labeled side facing the rear of the
server until it locks.
A
Figure 109: Inserting the Hot-swap Fan
A: Labels
169
User Guide
www.bull.com
6. Change the Redundant fan jumper setting from the position 1-2 (Normal) to 23 (Redundant Configuration).
A
Figure 110: Redundant Fan Jumper
A: Jumper position
Caution
To avoid system malfunction, leave other jumpers at its default
position.
7. Install the components you removed previously.
Removal
Follow these steps to remove or replace the hot-swap fan.
1. Pull out the server from the rack.
2. Remove the drive cover. See “Drive Cover” on page 108.
3. Locate the failed fan.
Fault lamp on the fan turns on when a fan failure occurs. A fan failure is also
indicated by NEC ESMPRO and system event log.
170
User Guide
www.bull.com
4. While pressing release tabs on the top of the fan, pull the fan up to remove
from the fan slot.
Figure 111: Removing a Fan
5. Install the new fan into the vacant slot.
Caution
If all the redundant fans are removed, change the redundant fan
jumper setting described earlier in the installation procedure.
171
User Guide
www.bull.com
Problem Solving
This chapter helps you identify and solve problems that may occur during system
installation or while using your system. The first section of this chapter tells you how to
reset your system in the event of problems. The next few sections provide
troubleshooting checklists and procedural steps that help you isolate specific system
problems. The last section includes BIOS and system user information.
Warning
The DC push-button on/off switch on the front panel does not
turn off completely the system AC power. +5vdc is present on
the system board whenever the AC power cord is connected
between the system and an AC outlet. Before doing the procedures in this manual, make sure that your system is powered off
and unplug the AC power cords from the back of the chassis.
Not disconnecting power before opening your system can result
in personal injury and equipment damage
Caution
Running your system with the cover removed can damage your
system components.
For proper cooling and airflow, always replace the covers
before powering on your system.
Static Precautions
An electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, option boards, and other
components. You can provide some ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strap
attached to chassis ground when handling system components.
Electronic devices can be easily damaged by static electricity. To prevent damage, keep
them in their protective packaging when they are not installed in your system.
172
User Guide
www.bull.com
Resetting the Server
There are two ways to reset the server.
Caution
Resetting the server clears the DIMM memory and the data in
process.
To reset the server when it is not frozen, make sure that no
processing is in progress.
■ Hard reset
Press the power switch at the front of the server. (see “Forcing a Power Shutdown” on
page 66)
Caution
If the remote power-on function is used, cycle the power once to
load the OS, and turn off the power again in the normal way.
If the processor is heated excessively, the circuit for protecting
expensive components is activated. If so, the POWER/SLEEP
switch cannot be used to control the power because the system
is entered into the reset status. Pull out the power cord and turn
off the power. After a while, check the operation environment
(including the ambient temperature). Then connect the power
cord and turn on the power. Wait a while before powering the
system on again.
■ Soft reset
If the server halts before starting the OS, press and hold Ctrl and Alt and press Delete.
This restarts the server.
173
User Guide
www.bull.com
Troubleshooting Guide
This section provides you a guide to identify a problem and locate its source.
Warning
The system power and any peripheral devices should be turned
off before connecting or disconnecting peripheral devices to or
from the system.
Otherwise, you could permanently damage the system or
peripheral devices.
1. Turn off the system and any peripheral devices. Disconnect all external
peripherals from the system, except for the keyboard and monitor. The
system´s power cord must be plugged into a grounded electrical outlet.
2. Make sure your keyboard and monitor are properly connected to the system.
Turn the monitor on, then adjust its brightness and contrast controls to suit
your preference (see your monitor´s documentation).
3. Turn the system on. If the power indicator does not light up, but the system
seems to be operating normally, the indicator may need replacement.
4. Monitor the power-on self test (POST) execution. Each time you turn on the
system, the POST checks the system board, memory, keyboard, and certain
peripheral devices.
5. Check the following during the POST:
IfthePOSTdoesnotdet ctanyerors,thesystemshouldbo tup.
Erorsthatdonotprevent hebo tproces (non-fat lerors)displayames agethatmayap earsimilartothefol wingdisplay:
■ (Error Message Line 1)
■ (Error Message Line 2)
■ Press <F1> to continue,
■ <F2> to enter Setup
■ You should note the error and press F1 to resume the boot-up process, or
F2 to enter Setup.
6. Errors that prevent the boot process from continuing (fatal errors) are
communicated by a series of audible beeps. If this type of error occurs, record
the information and refer to the Error Messages: Beep Codes section.
System Viewers
Monitor the occurrence of fault by NEC ESMPRO during the system operation.
Especially take note on whether any alert is reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on the
management PC. Check whether any alert is reported on the Operation Window, Data
Viewer, or Alert Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager.
174
User Guide
www.bull.com
Lamps
The server includes lamps to indicate the server states by a variety of colors and display
patterns on the front panel, hard disk drive, and power supply.
Refer to“Status Indicators” on page 205 for more information.
175
User Guide
www.bull.com
Problems at initial System Start-up
Problems that occur at initial system start-up are often caused by incorrect installation
of components or incorrect configuration. Hardware failure is a less frequent cause.
■ Are all cables properly connected and secure?
■ Is AC power available at the wall outlet?
■ Are the configuration settings correct in Setup? Are all drivers properly installed?
■ Are all the expansion cards fully seated in their slots on the motherboard?
■ Are all DIMMs installed correctly?
■ Is the processor fully seated in its socket on the motherboard?
■ Are switches and jumpers on the system board correct (if they have been changed
from their original default settings)?
■ Are all jumper and switch settings on optional add-on cards and peripheral devices
set correctly? Check the documentation included with these devices for details.
Ensure that there are no system resource conflicts between hardware components.
(For example, two add-on cards could inadvertently share the same interrupt,
resulting in a conflict.)
■ Are adapter cards and disk drives correctly installed?
■ Is the keyboard properly connected to the system and is it connected in the right
PS/2 port?
■ Is a bootable diskette installed in your system's floppy drive A:?
■ Is the hard disk properly formatted or defined?
■ Is the operating system properly loaded? Check the operating system documentation.
176
User Guide
www.bull.com
Problems After the System Has Been Running
Correctly
After the system hardware and software have been running correctly, problems can
indicate equipment failure. Use the checklist below to try and correct the situation.
If the problem recurs after you have checked these items, refer to the “Troubleshooting
Guide” on page 174 earlier in this chapter.
■ If you are running software from a diskette or CD, try using a new copy.
■ If you are running software from a hard disk drive, make sure that all of the
necessary files are installed. There may be a problem with the copy on the hard
disk. Reinstall the software on the hard disk and try again.
■ If problems appear intermittently, there may be a loose cable, dirt in the keyboard
(if keyboard input is incorrect), or other random component failures.
■ A transient voltage spike, power cut, or brownout may have occurred. Symptoms
of voltage spikes include a flickering video display, unexpected system reboots,
and the system not responding to user commands. If necessary, exit any open
applications and shut down your system power. Reboot the system, then load the
software and try again.
■ Voltage spikes can occasionally cause the heads of the disk drive to contact the
disk. This can corrupt or destroy data files. If you are experiencing voltage spikes
on the AC electrical power line, install an uninterruptible power supply between
the power outlet and the system’s power cord.
177
User Guide
www.bull.com
Problems Running New Application Software
Problems occurring when you run new application software are usually related to the
software. Faulty equipment is much less likely, especially if other software runs
correctly. Use the checklist below to see if the situation may be easily corrected. If the
problem persists after you have checked these items, contact the software vendor's
customer service.
■ Does the system meet the minimum hardware requirements for the software? Refer
to the software documentation.
■ Is the software an authorised copy? Unauthorised copies often do not work. Obtain
an authorised copy of the software.
■ If you are running the software from a CD or diskette, is it a good copy?
■ If you are running the software from a CD, is the disc scratched or dirty?
■ Is the software correctly installed? Were all necessary procedures followed and
files installed?
■ Are the correct device drivers installed?
■ Is the software correctly configured for the system?
■ Are you using the software correctly?
178
User Guide
www.bull.com
Problems and Suggestions
Contact your Authorised Service Representative if the suggested actions do not solve
the problem.
Table 20: Problems and Suggestions
What to do
Application software problems
What to do
Make sure all cables are installed correctly.
Verify that your system hardware configuration is set correctly. In Setup,
check the values against the system settings that you previously recorded. If
an error is evident (wrong type of drive specified, for example), make the
change in Setup and reboot the system. Record your change.
Make sure the software is properly configured for the system. Refer to the
software documentation for information. Try a different copy of the software to
see if the problem is with the copy you are using.
If other software runs correctly on the system, contact the vendor of the failing
software.
Characters on screen are distorted
or incorrect
Make sure the brightness and contrast controls are properly adjusted. Make
sure the monitor's video signal cable and power cables are properly installed.
(Shut down system power before reconnecting cables.) Make sure your
monitor is compatible with the video mode you have selected. (Check your
monitor's documentation.)
Characters do not appear on screen Make sure the monitor is plugged in and turned on. Are the brightness and
contrast controls properly adjusted? Make sure that the video signal cable is
properly connected. (Turn the system power off before reconnecting cables).
Make sure your system's video adapter card is installed, enabled. Reboot the
system.
CMOS RAM settings are wrong
If system settings stored in CMOS RAM change for no apparent reason (for
example, the time of day is in error), the backup battery may no longer have
enough power to maintain the settings. Replace the battery.
Diskette drive light does not go on Make sure the power and signal cables for the drive are properly installed.
when drive is in use or is tested by Check that the drive is properly configured and enabled in Setup.
POST.
Hard drive light does not go on
when drive is in use or is tested by
POST.
Power on light does not go on
Make sure the power and signal cables for the drive are properly installed.
Make sure the front panel connector is securely attached to the system board
headers. Check that the drive is properly configured and enabled in Setup.
Check the drive manufacturer's manual for proper configuration for remote
hard disk drive activity.
If the system is operating normally, check the connector between the system
board and the front panel. If OK, the light may be defective.
179
User Guide
www.bull.com
Problems with the Server
Fail to power on the server:
■
Is the server is properly supplied with power?
- Check if the power cord is connected to a power outlet (or UPS) that meets the
power specifications for the server.
- Check the power cord for broken shield or bent plugs.
- Make sure the power breaker for the connected power outlet is on.
- If the power cord is plugged to a UPS, make sure the UPS is powered and it outputs power. See the manual that comes with the UPS for details.
Power supply to the server may be linked with the connected UPS using the
CMOS Setup utility of the server.
<Menu to check: [Advanced] - [AC-LINK]>
■
Did you press the POWER/SLEEP switch?
- Press the POWER/SLEEP switch on the front of the server to turn on the power
(the POWER/SLEEP lamp lights).
Fail to power off the server
■ Is the power switch enabled?
- Restart the server and start the BIOS setup utility
■ Is the server running in secure mode?
- The power switch is disabled in the Secure Mode (Forced shutdown is also not
available). To release the Secure Mode, enter the password specified with the
BIOS Setup utility.
No screen display appears and beep occurs.
■
Is the DIMM board installed securely?
- Check whether the DIMM board is inserted into the mating connector securely.
- Check whether DIMMs of different specifications are installed in the specific
bank.
- DIMMs must be populated in pairs and in the following order:
11 and 21, 31 and 41, 12 and 22, 32 and 42, 13 and 23, and 33 and 43.
- Installed DIMMs must be the same speed and must all be registered.
- Take a note of beep code pattern, and take appropriate action according to the
table listed in “Beep Codes” on page 203.
- Make sure the jumper switches have been returned to their original positions
after CMOS clearing. See "Configuring Mother Board Jumpers" in Chapter 4
for the positions of the jumper switches.
180
User Guide
www.bull.com
POST fails to complete:
■
Is the DIMM board installed?
- At least two DIMM boards are required for operation.
- DIMMs must be populated in pairs and in the following order:
11 and 21, 31 and 41, 12 and 22, 32 and 42, 13 and 23, and 33 and 43.
- Installed DIMMs must be the same speed and must all be registered.
■
Is the memory size large?
- The memory check may take a few seconds if the memory size is large. Wait for
a while.
■ Did you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after you started
the server?
- If you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after start-up,
POST may accidentally detect a keyboard controller error and stops proceeding.
In such a case, restart the server once again. Do not perform any keyboard or
mouse operation until the BIOS start-up message appears when you restart the
server.
■
Does the server contain appropriate memory boards or PCI devices?
- Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed.
Fail to access to internal or external devices (or such devices fail to operate):
■ Are cables properly connected?
- Make sure that the interface cables and power cord are properly connected. Also
make sure that the cables are connected in the correct order.
■ Is the power-on order correct?
- When the server has any external devices connected, power on the external
devices first, then the server.
■ Did you install drivers for connected optional devices?
- Some optional devices require specific device drivers. Refer to the manual that
comes with the device to install its driver.
■ Is BIOS configuration correct?
- Some devices connected to the serial or parallel port may require I/O port
address or operation mode settings. Refer to the manual that comes with the
board for details to make correct settings.
The Power switch and sleep features are disabled:
■ Ιs the POWER switch masked by the BIOS feature?
181
User Guide
www.bull.com
- The BIOS can disable power-off with the POWER switch after the operating
system is started (including shutdown by pressing the POWER switch for at
least four seconds).
Run the BIOS SETUP utility to change settings.
The keyboard or mouse fails to operate:
■
Is the cable properly connected?
- Make sure that the cable is connected to the correct connector on the rear of the
server.
- The keyboard or mouse does not operate if it is connected when the server is
powered (not applicable to USB devices). Power of the server first and connect
it properly.
■ Is the BIOS configuration correct?
- The keyboard and mouse may have been disabled with the BIOS SETUP utility
of the server. Check the settings with the BIOS SETUP utility.
■
Are the server drivers installed?
- Refer to the manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and
mouse drivers are installed. (These drivers are installed along with the OS.)
Some OS's allow you to change the keyboard and mouse settings. Refer to manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse settings are
correct.
Fail to access to the CD-ROM:
■
Is the CD-ROM properly set in the DVD-ROM drive tray?
- The tray is provided with a holder to secure the CD-ROM. Make sure that the
CD-ROM is placed properly in the holder.
■
Is the CD-ROM applicable to the server?
- The CD-ROM for Macintosh is not available for use.
- For the disk which does not conform to the CD standard, the playback of such a
disk with the CD drive is not guaranteed.
Inserted the correct CD-ROM but an error message is displayed:
The CD-ROM is not inserted or the wrong CD-ROM is inserted.
Please insert the correct CD-ROM.
OK
■ Is the data side of the CD-ROM dirty or injured?
- Take the CD-ROM out of the DVD-ROM drive, check that it is not dirty or
injured, reset and click [OK].
182
User Guide
www.bull.com
Fail to access the hard disk
(Refer to the documentation supplied with the disk array controller.)
■ Is the hard disk applicable to the server?
- Operation of any device that is not authorized by Bull is not guaranteed.
■ Is the hard disk properly installed?
■ Is the hard disk properly configured?
Fail to access the (internal or external) SCSI devices:
■ Is the SCSI device applicable to the server?
- Operation of any SCSI device that is not authorized by Bull is not guaranteed.
■ Is the cable connection changed?
■ Are SCSI devices properly configured?
- When the server has external SCSI devices connected, devices settings, including SCSI ID and terminator, are required. Refer to the manual that comes with
the SCSI device for details.
■ Is cable length exceeded?
- Refer to the manual that comes with the SCSI device for details.
■ Are the optional SCSI controllers properly configured?
- When the server has an optional SCSI controller installed and SCSI devices
connected to it, use the POST Setup utility that comes with the optional SCSI
controller for proper configuration. See the manual that comes with the optional
SCSI controller for details.
The server is not found on the network:
■
Is the LAN cable connected?
- Make sure to connect the LAN cable to the network port on the rear of the
server. Also make sure that the LAN cable to use conforms with the network
interface standard.
■ Is the BIOS configuration correct?
- The internal LAN controller may be disabled with the BIOS SETUP utility of
the server. Check the setting with the BIOS SETUP utility.
■ Ηave the protocol and service already configured?
- Ιnstall the distinctive network driver for the server. Make sure that the protocol,
such as TCP/IP, and services are properly specified.
■ Ιs the transfer speed correct?
183
User Guide
www.bull.com
- Open the network property dialog box in control panel to specify the "Link
Speed & Duplex" value the same as the value specified for HUB.
Wake on LAN does not start from standby state.
■ Ιs Hub set to Auto-Negotiation? Or, Is the client set to Auto-Negotiation/optimum
speed?
- For both hub and client, Wake on LAN does not start from the standby state if
the speed is fixed to 1000Mbps.
Problems with Disk Array Configuration
Check the following if the server configured with a disk array does not operate properly
or if an utility does not operate correctly.
Fail to display the BIOS banner to run the utility:
■ Ιs the mother board configured?
- Change the RAID configuration jumper on the motherboard.
Fail to install the OS:
■ Ιs the disk array controller configured?
- Provide proper configuration for the disk array controller by using the SoftwareRAID Setup Utility (see Chapter 4).
Fail to start the OS:
■ Did the BIOS of the disk array controller change?
- Change the RAID configuration jumper on the motherboard.
■ Does the POST recognize the disk array controller?
- Make sure that the disk array controller is connected correctly, and power on the
server.
- The disk array controller on the mother board may be faulty. Contact your service representative.
Rebuild fails:
■ Ιs the capacity of the hard disk drive to be rebuilt sufficient?
- The hard disk drive to be rebuilt should have a capacity equal to the failed hard
disk drive capacity.
■ Is RAID0 configured?
184
User Guide
www.bull.com
- RAID0 has no data redundancy, and therefore, Rebuild is disabled in the
RAID0 configuration. Replace the failed hard disk drive, create the configuration data again and initialize the hard disk drives. Then recover the data by
using backup data.
Auto rebuild fails:
■ Was a sufficient time taken for hot swap of hard disk drives?
- To allow the auto rebuild to operate correctly, wait at least 90 seconds between
the removal of the failed hard disk drive and the installation of a new hard disk
drive.
■ Is the configuration correct?
- Check the auto rebuild settings by using the SoftwareRAID Setup Utility.
A hard disk drive fails:
- Contact your service representative.
Problems with Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
In some cases, an event log is registered as follows when you install Windows
Server 2003 x64 Editions.
Source: DCOM
Category:Error
Event ID: 10016
Description: The application-specific permission settings do not grant Local Activation
permission for the COM server application with CLSID {555F3418-D99E-4E51800A-6E89CFD8B1D7} to the user {NT AUTHORITY\LOCAL SERVICE} SID {S1-5-19}.
This security permission can be modified using the component Services administrative
tool.
- The system can be operated normally.
In some cases, an event log is registered as follows when you install Windows
Server 2003 x64 Editions.
Event Source:Service Control Manager
Event Type:Error
Event ID:7011
Description:Timeout (30000 milliseconds) waiting for a transaction response from the
IMAP4Svc service.
- If this event disappears when the system is rebooted, the system can be operated
normally.
185
User Guide
www.bull.com
Problems with Windows Server 2003 R2
In some case, an event log is registered as follows when you operate Windows
Server 2003 R2.
Source: IPMIDRV
Type: Error
Event ID: 1001
Description: The IPMI device driver attempted to determine if the system supported an
IPMI BMC device. The driver attempted to detect the presence of the IPMI BMC by
searching the SMBIOS for Type 38 record. But either no record was found or the
record was not compatible with the version of the device driver.
If a SMBIOS Type 38 record was detected, the Dump Data field of the event contains a
binary representation of the record.
- If you use the "Hardware Management" feature provided by Windows Server
2003 R2, above-shown event log will be registered.
186
User Guide
www.bull.com
Problems with Windows Server 2003
Windows Product Activation
This copy of Windows must be activated with Microsoft before you can continue. You
cannot log on until you activate Windows. To shut down the computer click Cancel.
In Windows Server 2003, the above message will be displayed if you use the operating
system without executing the license authentication. Select "Yes", and execute the
procedure for license authentication.
Cannot install the operating system correctly.
■ Did you check the notes on installing the operating system?
During installation, the following warning is registered in the System Log of the Event
Viewer:
Error detected on the device \Device\CdRom0 during the paging operation.
- There is no problem on this issue.
Fail to start the OS:
■ Is a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive?
- Take out the floppy disk and restart the server.
■ Is the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM in the DVD-ROM drive?
- Take out the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM and restart the server.
■ Is the OS broken?
- Use recovery process to recover the system. (See "Recovery for Windows 2000
System" in this Chapter.)
The OS presents unstable operation:
■ Did you update the system?
- Installing a network drive after installation of the OS may cause unstable operation. Use the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM to update the system.
The system does not restart automatically when a stop error occurs, though the
system is adjusted to automatically restarting:
- When the system does not restart automatically, restart it manually.
The system restarts automatically when a stop error occurs, though the system is
NOT adjusted to automatically restarting:
- There is no problem about this issue. Check the System Event Log to check that
STOP error occurred.
187
User Guide
www.bull.com
Cannot turn the power OFF at the blue screen:
- If you want to turn off the power at the blue screen, execute forced shutdown
(forced shutdown: continue to press POWER/SLEEP switch for 4 seconds). The
power will not be turned off if you press the switch for less than 3 seconds.
The PXE boot (network boot) fails or the server is not found on the network:
■ Is the cable connected properly?
- Connect the proper cable to the network port on the rear of the Express server.
In addition, make sure that the used cable conforms to the network interface
standard.
■ Is BIOS configuration correct?
- The internal LAN controller may be disabled with the CMOS Setup utility of
the server. Check the setting with the BIOS setup utility.
■ Have the protocol and service already configured?
- Install the distinctive network driver for the server. Make sure that the protocol,
such as TCP/IP, and services are properly specified.
■ Is the transfer speed correct?
- Open the network property dialog box in control panel to specify the link speed
and duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB.
■ The Telnet Service is not installed.
- Adjust the computer name to 14 characters or less, and then install the Telnet
Service as described below:
1. Click [Run] on Start menu.
2. Type "tlntsvr /service" in the [Open] box, and click [OK].
3. Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel] and click [Computer Management]
and then click the [Services] to specify whether the Telnet Service is registered.
Once the installation of Telnet Service is finished, you can reset the computer
name to 15 characters or more.
Problems with ExpressBuilder
When the server does not boot from the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM, check the
following:
■ Did you set the ExpressBuilder during POST and restart the server?
- If you do not set the ExpressBuilder during POST and restart the server, an error
message will appear or the OS will boot.
■ Is BIOS configuration correct?
188
User Guide
www.bull.com
- The boot device order may be specified with the CMOS Setup utility of the
server. Use the CMOS Setup utility to change the boot device order to boot the
system from the DVD-ROM drive first.
<Menu to check: [Boot]>
■ Has an error message appeared?
- When an error occurs while the ExpressBuilder is in progress, the following
message appears. After this message appears, check the error and take the
appropriate corrective action according to the message listed in the table below.
Table 21: Error Messages
Message
Cause and Solution
This machine is not supported
This ExpressBuilder version is not designed for
this server. Execute the ExpressBuilder on the
compliant server.
Hard disk access error
The hard disk is not connected or has failed.
Check whether the hard disk is correctly
connected.
NvRAM access error
An access to the non-volatile memory (NvRAM)
has failed.
The system-specific information does not exist
on the baseboard. Please restore the backup
data or write the data by using [System
Information Management] of the Off-line
Maintenance Utility. Only the authorized
personnel are allowed to do this operation.
The system-specific information can't be
acquired on the mother board.
Problems with Express Setup
■ Express Setup cannot be used.
Express Setup does not support the installation of Microsoft Windows Server 2003
x64 Editions. Perform “manual setup” if necessary.
■ Following message appears when you try to install Express Setup to the hard disk
that has smaller capacity than the specified partition size:
“The specified partition size has exceeded the capacity of the hard disk. The setup
created the partition at the maximum size that can be reserved on the hard disk.
Setup will continue the process.”
Then the system displays the OK button.
- It is not an abnormal condition. Press Enter to continue the installation.
■ The message “Press R to retry” can not be displayed correctly when copying the
files from CD-ROM or checking CD-ROM:
- Press R. When the message appears again even if you press R, restart the
Express Setup from the beginning. In case the same result occurred after the
restart of installation, contact Maintenance Service Company and ask them to
check the DVD-ROM drive.
189
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ Express Setup terminated and asks to input setup information.
- There are some errors on the specified setup information. Follow the instruction
to input the correct value. It is not necessary to cancel the installation. On Windows 2000, you might be asked to press Enter again after the last reboot of the
setup.
■ [OK] appears on the [Role of Computer] screen.
- If you select [OK] here, the setup will select the default value of Express Setup
for the later specification to continue the process.
Table 22: Default Value for Windows 2003
Specification of network Protocol
Protocol
TCP/IP[DHCP Specified]
Service
Select sharing Microsoft network files and
printer.
Client
Microsoft network client.
Component
SNMP, IIS (Excluding Professional)
Application
NEC ESMPRO Agent
MegaRAID Storage Manager (disk array
systems)
Power Console Plus (disk array systems)
■ [OK] does not appear on [Role of Computer] screen.
- [OK] does not appear if the Setup File that has already been created is loaded.
- [OK] appears only when you first enter the [Role of Computer] screen. Once
you go to the next screen from [Role of Computer], the [OK] will not appear
even if you enter [Back] to go back to the [Role of Computer] screen.
■ Selected [Use Existing Array] at [New/Existing RAID Configuration], but the OS
is installed in the whole area of the disk.
- Is there any other partition than the partition to re-use (excluding maintenance
area)? If no other partition exist, the setup will reserve the whole area of the disk
to install operating system.
■ Specified to join the Domain, but the system is installed as Workgroup.
- When the setup fails to join the Domain during the installation, it will install the
system as Workgroup. Open [System] in Control Panel to specify joining the
Domain.
■ Windows starts with a different display resolution from the specified value.
- If the specified display resolution can not be used, the system will use the nearest value or the default value of the driver.
■ Entered the incorrect Product ID/CD key.
190
User Guide
www.bull.com
- Even if you entered the incorrect Product ID/CD key, Express Setup will start.
However, the setup will stop and asks you to re-enter the correct value. Also in
this case, input request will occur when rebooting after GUI setup completed
during Express Setup. If these 2 inputs are done correctly, there is no problem
on Windows setup.
■ Unable to specify the details of Network adapter.
- In Express Setup, you can not specify the details of Network adapter. Specify
them from Control Panel after starting Windows.
■ Windows is started with Network adapter that has not been specified during
Express Setup
- Windows will install the recognized Network adapter specified as default value.
If you want to modify the specification, it can be done from Control Panel after
starting Windows. Also, the Network adapter that has been specified during
Express Setup but that is not connected will not be setup, though the protocol
will only be installed.
■ Connected more than two Network adapter and specified different protocol for
each adapter, but all the protocols are specified on either adapter.
- It's a design. Each adapter is specified so that all the installed protocols can be
used. The value that can not be specified during Express Setup will all be specified by default value.
■ When more than two Network adapter are specified, the detailed specification of
TCP/IP protocol are all set to use DHCP.
- When more than two Network adapter are specified, the detailed specification
of the protocol may all be set by default value. Re-specify the details from Control Panel.
■ Not more than two Network adapter is connected, but the detailed specification of
the protocol are all set by default.(e.g. Specified IP Address on TCP/IP, but DHCP
is specified)
- Are you specifying more than two protocols? In this case, the situation will be
the same as connecting more than two Network adapter, so the detailed specification of the protocol are all set by default. Re-specify the details from Control
Panel after starting the OS.
Problems with Disk Array Configuration
Refer to the manual supplied with the RAID controller.
Problems with Master Control Menu
The master control menu fails to appear:
■ Is your system Windows NT 4.0 or later, or Windows 95 or later?
191
User Guide
www.bull.com
- The CD-ROM Autorun feature is supported by Windows NT 4.0 and Windows
95. The older versions do not automatically start from the CD-ROM.
■ Is Shift pressed?
- Setting the CD-ROM with Shift pressed down cancels the Autorun feature.
■ Is the system in the proper state?
- The menu may not appear depending on the system registry setting or the timing to set the CD-ROM. In such a case, start the Explorer and run
\MC\1ST.EXE in the CD-ROM.
Problems with Configuration Diskette Creator
■ The bit map of the Configuration Diskette Creator window is not displayed
correctly during setting of setup information. (When the Trekking command is
used)
- Ιf the specified number of colors is fewer than 256 in the display setting, the bit
map is not displayed correctly, but the setup information can be displayed correctly.
■ The Point to Point tunneling protocol cannot be set.
- The protocol is not supported at present. After installation, set the protocol
through Control Panel. In this case, rebooting is not necessary.
■ The details of a network adapter cannot be set.
- Configuration Diskette Creator is unable to set the details of network adapters.
Start Windows 2000/2003, and set the details through Control Panel.
■ More than one network board is connected during setting of setup information, but
TCP/IP cannot be set for each network.
- Perform the installation procedure during DHCP setting. To create a temporary
IP configuration, perform the installation procedure during DHCP setting, and
then set TCP/IP again through Control Panel.
Problems with Disk Array Configuration
Refer to the manual that comes with the disk array controller for any trouble occurring
with the disk array in this system.
192
User Guide
www.bull.com
Collecting Dr. Watson Diagnostic Information
Dr. Watson collects diagnostic information related to application errors. The location to
save the information can be specified as you like.
193
User Guide
www.bull.com
Memory Dump
If an error occurs, the dump file should be saved to acquire necessary information.
If you saved the dump to DAT, write down that it is saved as "NTBackup" or
"ARCServe" on the label. You can specify the location to save the diagnostic
information as you like...
Caution
■ Consult with your sales agent before dumping the memory.
Dumping the memory while the server is in process may
affect the system operation.
■ Restarting the system due to an error may display a message indicating insufficient virtual memory. Ignore this message and proceed. Restarting the system may result in
dumping improper data.
Preparing for Memory Dumping
Memory dumping with the DUMP switch may disable the server to restart. In such a
case, it is required to force the server to shut down. This forced shutdown, however, is
not available if "Enable" is selected for "Power Switch Inhibit" on the Security menu of
the BIOS setup utility, SETUP, because this setting disables POWER switch operation.
Follow the procedure below to change the setting to enable the forced shutdown and
restart of the server.
1. Power on the server and start the BIOS setup utility, SETUP.
2. Select "Disable" for "Power Switch Inhibit" in the Security menu.
3. Save the configuration data and exit the SETUP.
Saving the Dump File
Press the DUMP switch to save the dump file when an error occurs. Insert a metal pin
(a straightened large paper clip will make a substitute) into the switch hole to press the
DUMP switch.
Pressing the DUMP switch saves the dump file in the specified directory. (Memory
dumping may not be available when the CPU stalls.)
Warning
Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that could break easily.
Do not use any pin easily broken such as a toothpick or plastic
pin.
194
User Guide
www.bull.com
Off-Line Maintenance Utility
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is an OS-independent maintenance program. When
you are unable to start the OS-dependent NEC ESMPRO to troubleshoot a problem, the
Off-line Maintenance Utility can be used.
Caution
■ The Off-line Maintenance Utility is intended for use of your
sales agent. The ExpressBuilder CD-ROM and the Off-line
Maintenance Utility Bootable FD you have created contain a
file that describes operation of the utility, but do not attempt
to use the utility by yourself. Contact your sales agent and
follow instructions.
■ Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility disables any access
from a client to the server.
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility
The Off-line Maintenance Utility may be started in many ways.
Caution
Do not start the Off-line Maintenance Utility while the server is
in successful operation.
■ From the CD-ROM
Set the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM in the DVD-ROM drive and reboot the system.
After the menu is displayed on the screen, select "Tools" - "Off-line Maintenance
Utility".
The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the CD-ROM.
■ From the floppy disk
Set the Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD in the floppy disk drive and
reboot the system.
The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the boot disk.
The Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD is created by selecting "Tools" "Create Support FD" on the ExpressBuilder.
■ Manual start (by pressing F4)
195
User Guide
www.bull.com
When the Off-line Maintenance Utility is installed, press F4 while the start-up
screen of the server is on screen. The Off-line Maintenance Utility starts from the
hard disk.
Off-line Maintenance Utility Features
The Off-line Maintenance Utility provides the following features. (Available features
vary depending on the way you started the Off-line Maintenance Utility.)
Caution
See the on-line help for details of the Off-line Maintenance Utility. For further information, ask your sales agent.
■ IPMI Information Viewer
Provides the functions to view the system event log (SEL), sensor data record
(SDR), and field replaceable unit (FRU) and to make a backup copy of them.
Using this feature, you can find system errors and events to determine a
maintenance part.
■ BIOS Setup Viewer
Provides the functions to export the current configuration data defined with the
SETUP utility to a text file.
■ System Information Viewer
Provides the functions to view information on the processor and the BIOS and
export it to a text file.
■ System Information Management
Provides the function to make a back-up copy of your data.
Without the backup data, the system-specific information and/or configuration
may not be restored.
Only the authorized personnel is allowed to restore the backup data.
■ Start of Utilities
With the ExpressBuilder, you can start the following utilities installed in the
maintenance partition.
–System Management
–System Diagnostics
–Maintenance Partition Update
196
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ Chassis Identify
This function can distinguish the machine with the lamp or buzzer of the machine.
This is convenient if you have to distinguish a machine among many machines on
the rack.
197
User Guide
www.bull.com
If You Need Assistance
If you have a problem with your computer, first review the troubleshooting sections of
this guide.
Note: Refer to the warranty booklet delivered with your
system to find out how to contact the local office in your country.
For technical support such as BIOS upgrades, consult our Web site at the following
address: http://www.nec-computers.com.
198
User Guide
www.bull.com
Error Messages
Error Messages
If an error occurs in the server, an error message appears on the display unit connected
to the server.
Error Messages after Power-on
Powering on the server automatically starts the self-diagnostic program, POST (Power
On Self-Test). When the POST detects any error, it displays an error message and its
measure on the display unit.
Follow the table below to troubleshoot such errors. However, even when there is no
hardware failure, use of the keyboard or mouse at the following timing causes the
POST to assume a keyboard controller error and stop processing.
■ Immediately after the server is powered
■ Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to a keyboard instruction
(simultaneous key entry of Ctrl + Alt + Delete)
■ Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to an OS instruction
■ During hardware initialization following restart of the POST
When the POST detects a hardware failure due to the above reason, restart the server
once again. If the same error message reappears, you may assume there is no hardware
error. To ensure normal operation of the server, however, make sure to follow the
following restrictions.
■ Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the memory count
appears on the screen following the server power-on.
■ Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the start-up message of
the SAS Configuration Utility appears on the screen following the server reboot.
Note: Note the on-screen message before contacting your
sales agent.
The message might greatly help for the
maintenance.
POST Error Messages
When POST detects an error, it displays an error message on the display unit screen.
The following table lists error messages and actions to take.
Note: Take a note on the messages displayed before
consulting with your sales agent. Alarm messages are useful
information for maintenance.
199
User Guide
www.bull.com
Table 23: POST Error Messages
Error
code
Error message
Recommended Action
0200
Failure Fixed Disk
Contact your service representative.
0210
Stuck Key.
Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again.
0211
Keyboard Error
Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again. If the
error cannot be corrected, contact your service
representative.
0213
Keyboard locked - Unlock key switch.
Release the lock of the key switch. If the error cannot
be corrected in spite of the release of the lock,
contact your service representative.
0220
Monitor type does not match CMOS - Run
SETUP.
Start the SETUP. If the error cannot be corrected in
spite of the start of SETUP, contact your service
representative.
0230
System RAM Failed at offset.
Contact your service representative.
0231
Shadow Ram Failed at offset.
0232
Extended RAM Failed at address line.
0250
System battery is dead - Replace and run
SETUP.
Contact your service representative to replace the
battery. (After restarting the computer, start the
SETUP to provide the setting again.)
0251
System CMOS checksum bad - Default
configuration used.
The default values have just been set. Start the
SETUP to provide the setting again. If the error
cannot be corrected, contact your service
representative.
0252
Password checksum bad - Passwords
cleared.
The password has just been cleared. Start the
SETUP to provide the setting again.
0260
System timer error.
0270
Real time clock error.
Start the SETUP to set the date and time again. If the
same error occurs successively in spite of the
resetting, contact your service representative.
0271
Check date and time setting.
02B0
Diskette drive A error.
Start the SETUP to set the "Legacy Floppy A" in the
Main menu again. If the same error occurs
successively in spite of the resetting, contact your
service representative.
02B2
Incorrect Drive A type - run SETUP.
Start the SETUP to provide the setting again. If the
error cannot be corrected, contact your service
representative.
02D0
System cache error - Cache disabled.
The cache cannot be used. Contact your service
representative.
02D1
System Memory exceeds the CPU's caching
limit.
Contact your service representative.
02F4
EISA CMOS not writeable.
02F5
DMA Test Failed.
02F6
Software NMI Failed.
02F7
Fail-safe Timer NMI Failed.
0B22
Processors are installed out of order.
Request the maintenance to replace the CPU.
0B28
Unsupported Processor detected on
Processor 1.
0B29
Unsupported Processor detected on
Processor 2.
Make sure that the server supports the CPU. If you
are not sure, contact your service representative to
request the maintenance.
200
User Guide
www.bull.com
Table 23: POST Error Messages (Continued)
Error
code
Error message
Recommended Action
0B30
FAN1 Alarm occurred.
Contact your service representative to replace the
fan.
0B31
FAN2 Alarm occurred.
0B32
FAN3 Alarm occurred.
0B33
FAN4 Alarm occurred.
0B34
FAN5 Alarm occurred.
0B35
FAN6 Alarm occurred.
0B36
FAN7 Alarm occurred.
0B37
FAN8 Alarm occurred.
0B42
Resource conflict.
Contact your service representative to replace the
fan.
Contact your service representative.
0B43
Warning: IRQ not configured.
0B45
System configuration data write error.
0B5F
Forced to use Processor with error
Because an error is detected in every CPU, the
system is forcibly started. Contact your service
representative.
0B60
DIMM group #1 has been disabled
Contact your service representative.
0B61
DIMM group #2 has been disabled
0B62
DIMM group #3 has been disabled
0B63
DIMM group #4 has been disabled
0B64
DIMM group #5 has been disabled
0B65
DIMM group #6 has been disabled
0B70
The error occurred during temperature
sensor reading.
Contact your service representative.
0B71
System Temperature out of the range.
Contact your service representative to replace the
fan.
0B74
The error occurred during voltage sensor
reading.
Contact your service representative.
0B75
System voltage out of the range.
0B80
BMC Memory Test Failed.
0B82
Turn off the power once and then on again to start the
server. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your
BMC Firmware Code Area CRC check failed.
service representative.
BMC core Hardware failure.
0B83
BMC 1BF or 0BF check failed.
0B8A
BMC SEL area full
Clear the system event logs using the BIOS SETUP
utility.
0B8B
BMC progress check timeout.
0B8C
BMC command access failed.
Turn off the power once and then on again to start the
server. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your
service representative.
0B81
0B8D
Could not redirect the console - BMC Busy -
0B8E
Could not redirect the console - BMC Error -
0B8F
Could not redirect the console - BMC
Parameter Error -
0B90
BMC Platform Information Area corrupted.
0B91
BMC update firmware corrupted.
0B92
Internal Use Area of BMC FRU corrupted.
This is not a fatal error. Turn off the power once and
then on again to restart the server. If the error cannot
be corrected, contact your service representative.
0B93
BMC SDR Repository empty.
Turn off the power once and then on again to restart
the server. If the error cannot be corrected, contact
your service representative.
201
User Guide
www.bull.com
Table 23: POST Error Messages (Continued)
Error
code
Error message
Recommended Action
0B94
IPMB signal lines do not respond.
0B95
BMC FRU device failure.
This is not a fatal error. Turn off the power once and
then on again to restart the server. If the error cannot
be corrected, contact your service representative.
0B96
BMC SDR Repository failure.
0B97
BMC SEL device failure.
0B98
BMC RAM test error.
0B99
BMC Fatal hardware error.
0B9A
Management controller not responding.
Update the optional RMC card firmware. If the error
cannot be corrected, contact your service
representative.
0B9B
Private I2C bus not responding.
0B9C
BMC internal exception.
Turn off the power once and then on again to start the
server. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your
service representative.
0B9D
BMC A/D timeout error.
Turn off the power once and then on again to start the
server. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your
service representative.
0B9E
SDR repository corrupt.
0B9F
SEL corrupt.
0BB0
SMBIOS – SROM data read error.
0BB1
SMBIOS – SROM data checksum bad.
8100
Memory Error detected in DIMM group #1.
8101
Memory Error detected in DIMM group #2.
8102
Memory Error detected in DIMM group #3.
8103
Memory Error detected in DIMM group #4.
8104
Memory Error detected in DIMM group #5.
8105
Memory Error detected in DIMM group #6.
8160
Mismatch processor speed detected on
processor 1.
9161
Mismatch processor speed detected on
processor 2.
None
Expansion ROM not initialized – PCI Mass
Storage Controller in slot n (n: slot number)
Disable initialization of the optional device expansion
ROM by using the BIOS SETUP utility (see Chapter
4).
H/W Configuration of BMC is corrupted.
!! Update BMC F/W Configuration by configuration tool !!
!! Refer to BMC configuration manual !!
Use the ExpressBuilder to configure the remote
management card (see Chapter 6).
Contact your service representative.
Contact your service representative to replace the
DIMM in the relevant group.
Contact your service representative.
202
User Guide
www.bull.com
Beep Codes
If an error occurs during the POST, the server beeps, indicating the type of error.
Each number indicates the number of short beeps, and a hyphen indicates a pause. For
example, the beep interval 1-2-2-3 indicates 1 beep, pause, 2 beeps, pause, 2 beeps,
pause, and 3 beeps notifying that a checksum error occurred on ROM.
Table 24: POST Error Beep Codes
Beeps
Error
Recommended Action
1-2
Option ROM initialization error
1. Check if the optional add-in card is properly installed.
2. Run the BIOS setup utility to check the IRQ assignment.
3. Ask your service representative to replace the add-in card
or mother board..
3-3
ROM checksum error
Replace the mother board.
DRAM refresh test error
1. Check if the DIMM is properly installed.
2. Remove the DIMM once, and then re-install it to check if it
1-2-2-3
1-3-1-1
operates normally.
3. Ask your service representative to replace the failed DIMM
or mother board.
1-3-1-3
Keyboard controller error
1. Check if the keyboard is properly connected.
2. Replace the mother board
1-3-3-1
No memory or capacity check
error
1. Check if the DIMM is properly installed.
2. Remove the DIMM once, and then re-install it to check if it
1-3-4-1
DRAM address error
1-3-4-3
DRAM test Low Byte error
1-4-1-1
DRAM test High Byte error
operates normally.
3. Ask your service representative to replace the failed DIMM
or mother board
1-5-1-1
CPU startup error
1-5-2-1
No CPU installed
1-5-4-4
Abnormal voltage
operates normally.
3. Ask your service representative to replace the failed CPU.
2-1-2-3
BIOS ROM copyright test error
Replace the mother board.
2-2-3-1
Unexpected interrupt test error
1. Check if the CPU is properly installed.
2. Remove the CPU once, and then re-install it to check if it
203
User Guide
www.bull.com
How to Identify BIOS Revision Level
To identify your system's current BIOS revision level, perform either one or the other
of the following procedures:
1. Power-on or reboot the system.
2. When logo displays, press the ESC key.
3. The BIOS revision level is displayed. Immediately press Pause to have time to
read the BIOS version.
or
1. Power-on or reboot the system. “Press <F2> to enter SETUP” displays.
2. Press F2.
3. In the Server menu, select System Management and press ENTER. The
BIOS revision level is displayed.
204
User Guide
www.bull.com
Status Indicators
This section explains the indication and meanings of the server lamps.
5
ID
2-1
2-2
4
1
2-1 & 2-2
3
4
5
1
3
Status lamp
ACT lamps
Disk access lamp
Power lamp
UID lamp (blue)
Figure 112: System Front Lamps
Power Lamp (
)
The green power lamp lights to indicate normal operation while the server is powered.
When the server is off-powered, the power lamp stays off.
The power lamp indicates that the server is running in the power-saving mode (sleep
mode). If the operating system supports the power-saving mode such as Windows
Server 2003, running a command blinks the power lamp in green and place the server
in the power-saving mode. Press the power switch to turn out the power lamp and
place the server back in the normal mode.
The power-saving mode is only available when the operating system supports the
power-saving feature. Some operating systems allow you to set the server to
automatically turn in the power-saving mode when no access is made to the server for a
certain period of time or to select the power-saving mode with a command.
Status Lamp (
)
The status lamp is on (green) while the server is operating normally. (The rear panel
also has the status lamp on it.) If the status lamp is off or turns amber and flashes, it
indicates that the server is in abnormal state.
The table below explains the status lamp indication, the meanings, and the procedures.
205
User Guide
www.bull.com
Notes:
■ When NEC ESMPRO or the offline maintenance utility is
installed, you can check the cause of a failure by referring to
the error log.
■ Shutdown processing can be performed through the operating system. When you want to restart the system after turning the power off, restart the system by performing shutdown
processing. If shutdown processing cannot be performed,
restart the system by resetting, forcibly turning the power off,
or disconnecting and then connecting the power cord.
Table 25: Status Lamp Indications
Status lamp
indication
Description
Procedure
On (green)
The server is operating normally.
Flashing (green) The server is operating with the memory or
CPU in degraded state.
An uncorrectable memory error has often
occurred.
Off
On (amber)
The power is off.
POST is in progress.
A CPU error occurred (IEER).
A CPU temperature alarm was detected.
A timeout occurred when the time set for the
watchdog timer arrived.
A CPU bus error occurred.
A memory dump request is made.
A temperature alarm was detected.
–
Check the AC power lamp indication on the
rear panel of the server.
Identify the device in degraded state by using
the BIOS setup utility "SETUP," and replace it
as soon as possible.
–
Wait for a while. The status lamp turns green
when POST is completed.
Turn the power off and then turn it on. If the
POST screen displays an error message, take
notes of the message, and contact your sales
representative.
Wait until the memory dump is completed.
Check if the internal fans are clean and if the
fan units are firmly connected.
If the status lamp indication does not change
when the fans are normal, contact your sales
representative.
Contact your sales representative.
A voltage alarm was detected.
All the power supply units failed.
206
User Guide
www.bull.com
Table 25: Status Lamp Indications (Continued)
Flashing (amber) Either of the following was detected in the
redundant power configuration:
AC power not supplied to one of the two power
supply units
Failure of one of the two power supply units
A fan alarm was detected.
A temperature warning was detected.
Connect the power cord to supply power. If
the power supply unit is faulty, contact your
sales representative.
Check if the fan units are firmly connected.
If the status lamp indication does not change
when the fans are normal, contact your sales
representative.
Check if the internal fans are clean and if the
fan units are firmly connected.
If the status lamp indication does not change
when the fans are normal, contact your sales
representative.
Contact your sales representative.
A voltage warning was detected
Disk Access Lamp ( )
The disk access lamp indicates the status of the hard disk mounted in the 3.5-inch disk
bay.
The lamp turns green each time access is made to the hard disk.
When the disk access lamp turns amber, it indicates that a hard disk failure has
occurred. Check the hard disk lamp for the status of the failing hard disk.
Caution
If a hard disk in the server is connected to the internal disk array
controller (which is additionally mounted), the access lamp signal cable (connected to the connector on the mother board)
must be connected from the disk array controller to the mother
board.
ACT Lamp (
)
The ACT lamp is green while the server is connected to the LAN. The lamp flashes
while the server is accessed via the LAN (during transmission/reception of packets).
The number next to the icon indicates the network port number on the rear panel of the
server.
UID Lamp (UID)
Pressing the UID switch toggles the front panel UID lamp (blue) and the mother board
UID lamp on and off. The mother board UID lamp is visible through the rear of the
chassis and allows you to locate the server you're working on from the rear of the
servers on a rack.
207
User Guide
www.bull.com
Disk Access Lamp
The disk access lamp of the optical disk drive is on while the drive is accessed.
Hard Disk Lamp
The disk lamp (A) mounted in the 3.5-inch disk bay indicates the following depending
on the status:
A
Figure 113: Hard Disk Lamp
■ Flashing (green)
The lamp indicates that the hard disk is accessed.
■ On (amber)
The lamp indicates a failure of a hard disk mounted in disk array configuration.
Note: Even if one of the hard disks fails in disk array
configuration (RAID1 or RAID5), the server can continue
operation. However, replace the disk as soon as possible, and
perform reconstruction (rebuild) processing. (The failing disk
can be replaced in hot swap mode.)
208
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ Flashing switching back and forth between green and amber
The lamp indicates that reconstruction (rebuild) processing is being performed for
the hard disk. (This flashing does not indicate a failure.) When a failing hard disk
is replaced in disk array configuration, the system automatically rebuilds the data.
(Auto-rebuild function) The lamp switches back and forth between green and
amber during rebuild processing.
The lamp goes off when the rebuild processing has terminated. It turns amber
when the rebuild processing fails.
Caution
If the server is turned off during rebuild processing, the processing is stopped. Restart the server, mount the new hard
disk in hot swap mode, and then perform rebuild processing
again. Observe the following notes on using the auto-rebuild
function.
■ Do not turn the power off. (Once the power is turned off, the
auto-build function does not start.)
■ Let 90 seconds or more pass between when dismounting a
failing hard disk and when mounting the new one.
■ Do not replace a failing hard disk while rebuild processing is
being performed for another hard disk.
LAN Connector Lamps
There are two lamps for each of the three LAN ports (connectors) on the rear panel.
B
C
A
A
Figure 114: LAN Connector Lamps
209
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ LINK/ACT lamp (A)
Each LINK/ACT lamp indicates the status of the standard network port of the
server. While power is supplied to the server and HUB and the connection is
correct, the lamp is on (green). The lamp turns green and flashes while the
network port is transmitting/receiving data.
If the lamp does not go on when the LINK state is placed, check if the network
cable is in normal state and if it is connected correctly. If the lamp does not go on
yet when the network cable is normal, the network (LAN) controller may be faulty.
In this case, contact your sales representative.
■ Speed lamp (B) for the data transmission ports
This lamp indicates whether each of the network ports normally equipped with the
server is operated through the 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T network
interface. If the lamp is lit amber, the network port is operated through
1000BASE-T. If the lamp is lit green, the network port is operated through
100BASE-TX. If the lamp is off, the network port is operated through 10BASE-T.
■ Speed LED (C) for the management port
This LED indicates whether each of the network ports normally equipped with the
server is operated through the 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T network interface. If
the LED is lit amber, the network port is operated through 100BASE-TX. If the
LED is off, the network port is operated through 10BASE-T.
AC Power Lamp
1
2
4
1
2
3
4
3
AC inlet
AC power lamp
Power supply slot 1
Power supply slot 2
Figure 115: Power Supplies
There is an AC power lamp for the power supply unit on the rear. The lamp turns green
and flashes when the power supply unit receives AC power from the power cord, which
is connected to the AC inlet. (Flashing amber indicates no AC power is received in
neither of two power supplies in the redundant configuration.)
210
User Guide
www.bull.com
The lamp turns green when the server power switch is turned on. If the lamp does not
go on when the server power switch is turned on or if it turns or blinks amber, the
power supply unit is probably faulty. In this case, contact your sales representative to
replace the power supply unit.
Note: If one power supply unit fails while an optional power
supply is mounted, the system can continue operation with the
other power supply unit (redundant function). The failing power
supply unit can be replaced in hot swap mode (with the power
on), without having to stop the system.
211
User Guide
www.bull.com
Appendix 1: Specifications
Table 26: Specifications
Item
CPU
Type
Standard
1
Maximum
2
Chipset
Memory
Bull NovaScale R460
Intel® Xeon™ processor
Intel 5000P (1066/1333 MHz)
Minimum
2 GB (1 GB x 2)
Maximum
48 GB (The standard DIMM must be replaced.)
Expansion unit
2 DIMMs (512 MB / 1 GB / 2 GB / 4 GB)
Expansion times
6 times
Memory module
SDRAM DIMM (Low Profile DDR2-533 or DDR2-667 FullBuffered Type)
Error check
ECC
Graphics (VRAM)
Integrated 2 MB
Auxiliary
input
device
Floppy disk (option)
3.5-inch drive x 1 (USB)
Hard disk (standard)
None
Hard disk (maximum)
1.8 TB (300 GB x 6)
DVD-ROM (standard)
ATAPI interface x 1 (Load on tray type, x24 speed)
Hard disk bay
6 slots
3.5-inch bay
1 slot
Full height
PCI EXPRESS (x8) x 1 slot
PCI-X (64-bit/100 MHz) x 2 slots
Low Profile
PCI EXPRESS (x8) x 1 slot
PCI EXPRESS (x4) x 2 slots
Additional
bay
Additional
slot
LAN interface
1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T (2 ports)
100Base-TX/10Base-T management port (1 port)
External
interface
Keyboard/mouse
MINI DIN 6-pin connector (1 port)
USB
4-pin (4 ports, 2 at front panel, 2 at rear panel)
Serial
2 ports, (D-sub 9-pin)
Network
RJ-45 (2 ports)
Display
MINI D-sub 15-pin
SCSI
Option
Cabinet design
Rack-mount type (2U)
External dimensions
427 (width) x 88 (height) x 722 (depth) mm
Weight (Max.)
21 kg (30 kg)
Power supply
100 to 120 VAC ±10%, 200 to 240 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±1
Hz
Power consumption (maximum)
527 VA, 516 W (790 VA, 780 W)
212
User Guide
www.bull.com
Table 26: Specifications (Continued)
Environmental
requirements
Others
Temperature
10 to 35 °C (operating), -10 to 55 °C (non-operating, storage)
Humidity
20 to 80% RH (no condensation)
ExpressBuilder supported, NEC ESMPRO provided in the
standard configuration
213
User Guide
www.bull.com
Appendix 2: IRQs
The factory-set interrupt requests and I/O port addresses are listed below. Find an
appropriate one to install an optional device.
Interrupt Requests
The factory-set IRQs are assigned as follows:
Table 27: Interrupt Requests
IRQ
Peripheral Device
(Controller)
IRQ
Peripheral Device
(Controller)
0
System timer
12
Mouse
1
Keyboard
13
Numeric processor
2
-
14
Primary IDE
3
COM2 serial port
15
Secondary IDE
4
COM1 serial port
16
USB
5
PCI
17
VGA
6
-
18
-
7
PCI
19
USB
8
Real-time clock
30
LAN1
9
ACPI compliant system
31
LAN2
10
PCI
49
Onboard SAS 1
11
BMC IRQ
50
Onboard SAS 2
PIRQ and PCI Device
The factory-set PCI device interrupts are assigned as follows.
Table 28: PCI Devices Interrupts
Menu
Option
Interrupt
Recommended
PCI IRQ 1
LAN 1
IRQ 7
PCI IRQ 2
-
IRQ 7
PCI IRQ 3
-
Auto Select
PCI IRQ 4
USB ports 1 and 2
IRQ 5
PCI IRQ 5
PCI slot #1
IRQ 11
PCI IRQ 6
-
Auto Select
PCI IRQ 7
-
Auto Select
PCI IRQ 8
USB port 3
IRQ 5
214
User Guide
www.bull.com
I/O Port Address
The factory-set I/O port addresses for the server are assigned as follows:
Table 29: I/O Port Address
Address*
Chip in Use
00 – 0F
DMA1 controller
20 – 21
Interrupt controller 1
2E – 2F
Super I/O configuration
40 – 43
Timer 1
4EÅ|4F
(Super I/O configuration 2)
60
Keyboard/mouse
61
Non-maskable interrupt
64
Keyboard/mouse
70 - 73
Real time clock, Non-maskable interrupt
80 – 8F
DMA1, DMA2
92
Port 92
A0 – A1
Interrupt controller 2
B2 – B3
Advanced power management
C0 – CF
DMA controller 2
F0
Coprocessor
170 – 177
(IDE secondary bus)
1F0 – 1F7
(IDE primary bus)
2F8 – 2FF
Serial port 2
370 – 377
(Floppy disk controller 2), IDE controller 2
3BF – 3DF
VGA
3F0 – 3F7
Floppy disk controller1, IDE controller 1
3F8 - 3FF
Serial port 1
4D0 - 4D1
Interrupt controllers 1 and 2
CF8 – CFB
PCI configuration address/reset control
CFC - CFF
PCI configuration data
* Hexadecimal notation
215
User Guide
www.bull.com
Appendix 3: Maintenance
This chapter describes the daily maintenance of the system and precautions when
relocating or storing the system.
Making Backup Copies
We recommend you make backup copies of your valuable data stored in hard disks of
the system on a regular basis. For backup storage devices suitable for the system and
backup tools, consult with your sales agent.
When you have changed the hardware configuration or BIOS configuration, select
"System Information Management" and then "Save" of the Off-line Maintenance
Utility to make a backup copy of the system information.
Also make a backup copy of the disk array configuration data if your system is in the
array configuration. When your hard disks have been auto-rebuilt due to a failure, it is
recommended to make a backup copy of the configuration data. To make a backup
copy of the configuration data, use the configuration utility that is resident in the
FLASH memory on the optional disk array controller board. Refer to the manual
supplied with the board.
Cleaning
Clean the system on a regular basis to keep the system in a good shape.
Warning
■
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the system
■
Do not look into the optical device drive
■
Do not remove the lithium battery
■
Disconnect the power plug before working with the system
Caution
■
Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions
■
Make sure to complete board installation
■ Protect the unused connectors with the protective cap
216
User Guide
www.bull.com
Cleaning the External Surfaces of the system
Caution
■ To avoid altering the material and color of the system, do not
use volatile solvents such as thinner and benzene to clean
the system.
■ The power receptacle, the cables, the connectors on the
rear panel of system, and the inside of the system must be
kept dry. Do not moisten them with water.
For daily cleaning, wipe the external surfaces of the system with a dry soft cloth
If stains remain on the surfaces:
1. Make sure that the system is off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).
2. Unplug the power cord of the system from a power outlet.
3. Wipe off dust from the power cord plug with a dry cloth.
4. Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm
water, and squeeze it firmly.
5. Rub off stains on the system with the cloth prepared in Step 4.
6. Soak a soft cloth in water, squeeze it firmly, wipe the system with it once
again.
7. Wipe the system with a dry cloth.
8. Wipe off dust from the fan exhaust opening on the rear of the system with a dry
cloth.
Cleaning the Interior of the system
One important item in a good maintenance program is regular and thorough cleaning of
the interior of the system, especially around the motherboard.
Dust buildup inside the system can lead to several problems. As dust acts as a thermal
insulator, a buildup can prevent proper system cooling. Excessive heat will shorten the
life of system components. Also, dust may contain conductive or corrosive materials
that can cause short circuits or corrosion of electrical contacts.
How often you should clean the interior of the system depends on the environment in
which it is located. For most office environments, you probably should clean the
system every 12 months. For more severe environments, clean the interior every 6
months.
217
User Guide
www.bull.com
To clean the interior of the system, you will need a small vacuum cleaner (with plastic
tipped nozzle and electrostatic protection), a computer grade canned air, and a small
brush.
Warning
Unplug all power cords before performing any maintenance.
Voltage is present inside the system and display unit even after
the power is turned off. All voltage is removed only when the
power cord is unplugged.
Caution
Do not use the brush made of chemical fabric, or the
cleaning material that will generate an electrostatics.
To clean the interior of the system:
Turn off the system and unplug all power cables.
Remove the logic cover and the drive cover.
Use a small brush to loosen any dust and debris on the mother board.
Use computer grade canned air to blow dust off components on the
motherboard.
5. Use a small vacuum cleaner with plastic tip to vacuum out dust and debris from
the interior of the system.
6. Reinstall the logic cover and the drive cover.
7. Reconnect all power cables and turn on the system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cleaning the Keyboard
1. Power off the system and peripheral devices.
The POWER/SLEEP lamp is off.
2. Wipe the keyboard surface with a dry cloth.
218
User Guide
www.bull.com
Cleaning the Mouse
The mouse operation depends on the degree of smoothness of the internal ball rotation.
To keep the mouse ball clean, use the mouse in a place with little dust.
To clean the mouse:
1. Prepare cold or lukewarm water, neutral detergent, alcohol, two dry soft
clothes, and cotton swabs.
2. Power off the system.
The POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off.
3. Turn the mouse upside down, and rotate the mouse ball cover
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. Take out the ball from the mouse. Cover the bottom of the mouse with your
hand, and turn your hand holding the mouse (the mouse is on your palm with
the button upward). The mouse ball is released onto your palm.
5. Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm
water, and squeeze it firmly.
6. Rub off stains on the mouse ball. Softly wipe the mouse ball with the cloth
prepared in Step 5.
7. Wipe the mouse ball with a dry soft cloth.
8. Wipe three small rollers inside the mouse with a cotton swab soaked with
alcohol. Wipe stains slowly and carefully by rotating rollers with the tip of the
cotton swab.
9. Blow out any dust from the mouse. Protect your eyes from the dust.
10. Put the mouse ball back into the mouse.
11. Place the mouse ball cover, and rotate it clockwise until it is locked.
Cleaning an Optical Drive and CD-Rom/CD-RW/DVD-Rom
A dust-accumulated tray or a dusty optical drive may cause the device not to read data
correctly.
To Clean an Optical Drive:
1. Power the system.
The POWER/SLEEP lamp is lit.
2. Press the optical drive tray Open/Close button on the front of the optical drive.
The tray os openning.
3. Hold the CD-ROM/CD-RW or DVD-Rom and take it out from the tray.
Note: Do not touch the signal side of the CD-ROM with your
hand.
219
User Guide
www.bull.com
4. Wipe the tray with a dry soft cloth.
Caution
Do not wipe the lens of the optical drive. Doing so may damage
the lens and may cause a malfunction of the drive.
5. Push on the tray front to close the tray.
To Clean a CD-Rom or CD-RW or DVD-Rom:
Wipe the signal side of the disk with a dry soft cloth.
Caution
■ Wipe disks from the center to the outside.
■ Use only CD-ROM cleaner if necessary. Cleaning a CDROM or CD-RW or DVD-ROM with record spray/cleaner,
benzene, or thinner causes damage to the disk contents. At
worst, inserting the disk into the system may cause failure.
220
User Guide
www.bull.com
System Diagnostics
The System Diagnostics runs several tests on the system.
Use the System Diagnostics program in the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM provided with
the system to diagnose the system.
Test Items
The following items are tested in system diagnostics.
■ Memory
■ CPU cache memory
■ Hard disk used as a system
Caution
When executing the System Diagnostics, make sure to disconnect the LAN cable.
The network may be influenced when executing the System
Diagnostics with the LAN cable connected.
Note: On checking the hard disk, no data is written into the
disk.
221
User Guide
www.bull.com
Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics
There are two ways to diagnose the system: to use the local console (keyboard) of the
system itself, and to use the management PC via serial port (remote console).
Caution
Use the serial port to execute System Diagnostics with remote
console. The LAN connection is not for System Diagnostics.
Procedures to start the diagnostics program is as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Shutdown the OS, and power off the system. Then, unplug the power cord.
Disconnect all the LAN cables from the system.
Plug the power cord and power on the system.
Reboot the system with the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM.
Select [Tools].
Select [System Diagnostics].
The System Diagnostics starts and completes in three minutes.
When the diagnosis completes, the test window title shows "Test End".
■ Diagnosis tool title: shows a name of this diagnosis and Version
information.
■ Test windows title: shows the progress of diagnosis. When it completes,
it shows "Test End".
■ Test Result: shows the information including time of start, end and
progress, and result of the diagnosis.
■ Guide line: shows a description of keys to navigate the window.
■ Test window: Move the cursor and press Enter to view the detail of the
diagnosis.
If an error is detected during the System Diagnostics, the test result shows "Abnormal
End" in red color. Move the cursor and press Enter on the diagnosis which error
occurred. Take a note of the error message showed, and contact your sales agent.
222
User Guide
www.bull.com
7. Follow the Guide line shown in the bottom of the screen and press Esc to show
the End user Menu.
■ <Test Result> shows the screen of the diagnosis completed
aforementioned.
■ <Device List> shows the information of all the devices connected.
■ <Log Info> shows the log information and error messages of the
diagnosis. it can be saved to a floppy disk. To save the log information to
a floppy disk, insert a formatted floppy disk to a floppy disk drive and
select <Save [F]>.
■ <Option> gives access to the different option menus.
■ <Reboot> Restarts the system.
8. Select <Reboot> in the Enduser Menu above.
The Express system restarts and ExpressBuilder boot the system.
9. Exit ExpressBuilder, and remove the CD-ROM from the optical device drive.
10. Turn off the system and unplug the power cord from the receptacle.
11. Reconnect all the LAN cables to the system.
12. Plug the power cord.
This completes the System Diagnostics.
223
User Guide
www.bull.com
Appendix 4: Installing
Microsoft
Windows Server 2003
This section describes the procedures for installing Windows Server 2003 without
using the Express Setup tool.
Before Installing Windows Server 2003
Please read carefully the following information BEFORE beginning your Windows
Server 2003 Installation.
Application of Service Pack
The ServicePack 1 is mandatory to use Windows Server 2003 with this equipment.
When installing Windows Server 2003 R2, it is not necessary to apply Service Pack 1.
Updating System
If you change the configuration of the system, update your system with the
ExpressBuilder CD-ROM delivered with your system.
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded
to Dynamic Disk
If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk
upgraded to Dynamic Disk, note the following issue:
■ Do not select the partition where the operating system had been installed as the
partition to install the operating system newly.
■ Select "Use the current File System" for the format of operating system partition.
Manual Installation when the Disk Array Controllers are Connected
If you keep the disk array controllers connected during the installation process, pop-up
messages may appear. This does not affect the system behavior. Click [YES] and
continue the installation.
224
User Guide
www.bull.com
Magneto-Optical device
If you specify the file system as NTFS with a MO Device connected during the
installation, the file system will not be converted normally. Disconnect the MO device
and restart the installation from the beginning.
Media such as DAT
Do not connect such devices to the server before installing the operating system.
Floppy Disk Drive
No internal floppy disk drive is included in your system. Prepare an optional USB
floppy disk drive if necessary.
225
User Guide
www.bull.com
Partition Size
The minimum size for the partition where the system is to be installed can be calculated
from the following formula.
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size
Size necessary to install the system=
3500 MB (Windows Server 2003 R2)
3500 MB (Windows Server 2003 + Service Pack 1)
4400 MB (Windows Server 2003 + Service Pack 1 CD-ROM)
Paging File Size (Recommended)= Mounted Memory Size × 1.5
Dump file Size= Mounted Memory Size + 12 MB
Application size = Required size
Caution
■ The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for
collecting debug information (memory dump). A paging file
with an initial size large enough to store the dump file in the
boot drive is required.
It may be impossible to collect correct debugging information
due to a virtual memory shortage if the paging file is insufficient, so we recommend you set a paging file large enough
for the entire system.
■ The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is 4095 MB. If the above paging file size exceeds
4095 MB, specify 4095 MB for the paging file size.
■ The maximum dump file size for the system with more than
2 GB memory mounted is '2048 MB + 12 MB'.
■ If you install any application program or the like, add necessary space to the partition to install these programs.
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512 MB, the minimally required partition
size will be calculated by the above formula as follows:
3500 MB + (512 MB * 1.5) + (512 MB + 12 MB) + Application size = 4792 MB +
Application size
If the required partition size is larger than the size of a hard disk drive, we recommend
you split the file across several disks.
1. Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".
226
User Guide
www.bull.com
2. Set the debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) so that it is
written to a separate disk.
(If necessary, install an additional new disk.)
227
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installing Microsoft Windows Server 2003
You will need the following for the installation of the Windows Server 2003:
■ ExpressBuilder CD-ROM
■ Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition (CD-ROM), Microsoft
Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition (CD-ROM), Microsoft Windows Server
2003 R2 Standard Edition (CD-ROM), or Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2
Enterprise Edition (CD-ROM).
■ Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Service Pack (CD-ROM).
■ User's Guide
■ Getting Started
■ Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder
Before installing, create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder.
Creating "Windows 2003 OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder"
You can create the Windows 2003 OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder with the following
two procedures:
Creating from the menu which appears when running BULL NovaScale Server with
ExpressBuilder
Use this procedure if you have only the BULL NovaScale Server to create the
Windows 2003 OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder.
■ If you have only the BULL NovaScale Server to create the Windows Server 2003
OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder, use this procedure.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Prepare a 3.5-inch floppy disks.
Turn on your BULL NovaScale Server.
Insert the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM in the optical device drive.
Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reboot the server. (You may also turn off and then
on again to reboot the server.)
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and the ExpressBuilder starts.
Select [Create Support Disk] from [Tools].
Select [Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder] from the
[Create Support Disk] menu.
Insert a diskette in the floppy disk drive according to the on-screen instruction.
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder will be created.
Write-protect and label the diskette, then keep it in a safe place.
228
User Guide
www.bull.com
Creating Windows 2003 OEM-DISK from [Master Control Menu]
Use this procedure if Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 can be operated on
BULL NovaScale Server.
[Master Control Menu] runs on the following operating systems.
- Windows Server 2003 x64
- Windows Server 2003
- Windows 2000
- Windows Me/98/95
- Windows NT 4.0
- Windows XP x64 Edition
- Windows XP
You can create the Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder from
[Master Control Menu], if you have the computer on which one of the above
operating system operates.
Follow the steps below:
1. Prepare a 3.5-inch floppy disks.
2. Run the operating system.
3. Insert the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM in the optical device drive.
[Master Control Menu] is displayed.
4. Click [Setup] with the left mouse button, click [Make OEM-DISK] and then
[for Windows Server 2003].
Note: You can do the same operation using the menu
displayed by a right-click.
5. Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message.
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder will be created.
6. Write-protect and label the diskette, then keep it safely.
229
User Guide
www.bull.com
Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003.
1. Turn the system on.
2. Insert the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM in the optical device drive.
3. Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.
After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk, press
Enter while the message "Press any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at the
top of the screen.
If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk, this step is
unnecessary.
The Windows Server 2003 setup screen will be displayed. If the screen is not
displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.
Retry after turning the system off and then on again.
4. If a RAID or SCSI controller is installed, press F6 in a few seconds when the
window is in one of the following states:
– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration..." is displayed.
– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.
Note: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has
been pressed.
5. When the following message is displayed, press S.
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.
The following message is then displayed.
Please inert the disk labeled
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk
into Drive A:
*Press ENTER when ready.
230
User Guide
www.bull.com
6. Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder into the
floppy drive, and press Enter.
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.
7. Select the [LSI Logic Fusion-MPT SAS Driver (Server 2003 32-bit) ] and press
Enter.
8. Select the driver according to your configuration (embedded or external
adapter), and follow the on-screen instructions.
9. When prompted to do so, press Enter to start the "Welcome to Setup" wizard.
Once the installation of Windows Server 2003 is finished, the system reboots
automatically.
■ Windows Server 2003: go to step 13.
■ Windows Server 2003 R2: go to step 10.
10. The [Windows Setup] screen will be displayed once logged on to the system.
Caution
■ In some cases, the [Windows Setup] screen may not be displayed. However, make sure to install Microsoft Windows
Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 according to the following procedures.
■ Make sure you install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2
DISC 2 after the application of "System update". In this case,
note that the [Windows Setup] screen is not displayed.
11. Insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 CD-ROM into the DVDROM drive. Confirm the parameters and click [OK].
12. When the installation has completed, remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003
R2 DISC 2 CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive, and restart the system.
13. Once the installation is completed, execute the tasks described in “Driver
Installation and Device Settings” on page 234 and “Updating System” on
page 224.
231
User Guide
www.bull.com
Reinstallation to Multiple Logical drives
This section describes the procedure for reinstalling the operation system if the
multiple logical drives exist.
Before Re-installing the Operation System
Be sure to make backup copies before re-installing the operation system just in case.
Re-installing the Operation System
1. Start the clean installation following the procedure described in this guide.
2. Specify the partition in which you want to install the operating system when
the following message appears:
The following list shows the existing partitions and unpartitioned space on this
computer.
Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list.
* Cannot modify the drive letter of your system or boot volume. Confirm the
proper drive letter is assigned and then, continue the setup.
3. Continue the clean installation following the procedure described earlier in this
chapter.
* The drive letter of the re-installed system may differ from the one of the
previous system. If you need to modify the drive letter, follow the procedure
"Modifying the Drive Letter".
Modifying the Drive Letter
Be careful that the drive letter of the system or boot volume cannot be modified with
the following procedure.
1. Click Start menu, right-click [My Computer], and specify [Manage] to start
[Computer Management].
2. Specify the [Disk Management] in the left side of the window.
3. Right-click the volume for which you want to modify the drive letter and
specify the [Change Drive Letter and Path...].
4. Click [Yes].
5. Choose the [Assign a drive letter] and specify the drive letter you want to
assign.
6. Click [OK].
7. If the following message appears, click [Yes]:
Changing the drive letter of a volume may cause programs to no longer run.
Are you sure you want to change this drive letter?
8. Close the [Computer Management].
232
User Guide
www.bull.com
Updating the System
To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following
procedures.
1. Logon to the system using the administrator account or other account which is
a member of the Administrators group.
2. Insert the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM into the optical device drive.
[Master Control Menu] is displayed on the screen.
3. Click [Setup] with the left mouse button and click U [Update BULL NovaScale
system] section.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to continue system update.
5. Click [OK] to restart the system.
6. Remove the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM from the optical device drive
immediately after clicking [OK].
Caution
If you change the configuration of the system (by adding or
removing hardware or Operating system software components)
or repair the system, you must run the system update again.
233
User Guide
www.bull.com
Driver Installation and Device Settings
This section describes how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the
device.
For information on installing and setting up a driver that is not described in this section,
please refer to the document delivered with the driver.
PROSet
PROSet is a utility that checks the function of network contained in the network driver.
Using PROSet enables the following items:
■ Verify detailed information of the adapter.
■ Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.
■ Setup of teaming.
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant
environment on any trouble and enhance throughput between the switches.
PROSet is necessary to use these features.
To install PROSet:
1. Insert the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM into the optical device drive.
2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.
a. In the case of the standard start menu, click Start menu and click
[Windows Explorer].
b. In the case of the classic start menu, click Start menu, point to
[Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3. Run "DXSETUP.exe" in the following directory:
<DVD-ROM driveLetter>:\WINNT\DOTNET\NS4\PROSet\2KXPWS03
The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.
4. Click [Next].
5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].
6. Choose "Complete" and click [Next].
7. Click [Install].
8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].
9. Restart the system.
Network Driver
Specify the details of network driver.
The standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically, but the
link speed and duplex mode need to be specified manually.
[When PROSet is not installed]
1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box is displayed.
234
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ Procedure with the standard start menu: click Start menu, [Control
Panel], [Network Connections], and [Local Area Connection].
■ Procedure with the classic start menu:
a. Click Start menu, Click [Settings] and Click [Network Connections].
The [Network Connections] dialog box is displayed.
b. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from popup menu.
2. Click [Configure].
The property dialog box for the network adapter is displayed.
3. Click [Advanced] and specify the same value for [Link Speed & Duplex] and
for the HUB.
4. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.
[When PROSet is installed]
1. The [Intel PROSet] dialog box appears.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel], [Administrative tools], and
click [Computer Management] and then double click the [(Network
Adapter Name)] in the Network Adapter list.
* Procedure with the classic start menu
a. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].
b. Click [Administrative tools].
c. Click [Computer Management] and double click the [(Network Adapter
Name)] in the Network Adapter list.
2. Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.
3. Click [Speed] and specify the same value for [Link Speed & Duplex] and for
the HUB.
4. Click [Apply] and click [OK].
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which
can be displayed from [Network and Dial-up Connection].
Note: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at
[AddingServices]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (or
the packet) that the computer installing [Network Monitor] sends
or receives. This tool is valuable when analyzing network
trouble. For information on how to install the tool, see the
"Setup for TroubleProcess" later in this document.
Re-install the Network Driver
The network driver will be installed automatically.
235
User Guide
www.bull.com
Graphics Accelerator Driver
The drivers for the graphics accelerator cards that are installed in the server will setup
automatically.
If you remove an additional graphics card, make sure to remove its corresponding
driver.
Should it be necessary to install manually the drivers, follow the procedure below.
If you want to use an optional graphics acceletaror card, setup the card according to
what is written in the card’s documentation.
1. Insert the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
2. Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows
Explorer]
3. Run "SETUP.EXE" in the following directory.
To install a standard graphics accelerator driver:
<DVD-ROM
drive
Letter>:\WINNT\DOTNET\VIDEO\MATROX/
SETUP.EXE
To install a graphics accelerator (N8105-45) driver:
<DVD-ROM drive Letter>:\WINNT\DOTNET\VIDEO\ES1000/SETUP.EXE
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to continue the installation. If a message
“Digital signature could not be found” appears, select Yes to continue.
5. Remove the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive, follow the
on-screen directions and restart the system.
Installing SCSI Controller Drivers
Update the drivers for your system using the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM shipped with
your system.
The SCSI drivers will be installed automatically.
Installing a Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 114, SecuRAID
121)
To install these controllers on a system running under Windows Server 2003, connect
the controller and take the following steps to install the driver:
1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel] →
[Administrative Tools] → [Computer Management].
236
User Guide
www.bull.com
2. Double-click [LSI Logic Megaraid SCSI 320-1/2] which Device Manager lists.
3. Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...].
4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or
specific location [Advanced]" and click [Next].
5. Select the "Search for the best driver in these locations." and check the "Search
removable media [floppy, CD-ROM...]" check box.
6. Insert "Windows Server 2003 x64 OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder" into the
floppy disk drive, and click [Next].The drivers are copied.
7. The [Completing the Hardware Update Wizard] dialog box appears. Click
[Finish].
Note on using the Adaptec 29320 Controller Board
It may happen that the driver is not installed during the OS installation.
In that case, please use the following procedure to install the driver.
1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel] →
[Administrative Tools] → [Computer Management].
2. Double-click the SCSI Controller driver in Other device.
3. Click [Update Driver].
4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or
specific location [Advanced]" and click [Next].
5. Select "Don't search. I will choose the driver to install" and click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk..].
7. Insert "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER" into the
floppy disk drive, enter "a:\" into "copy manufacturer's file from:" and click
[OK].
8. Specify one of the following drivers and click [Next].
■ INITIO INI-A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller]
(When board Initio 101 is installed.)
■ Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP-Ultra320 SCSI ]
(When board Adaptec 29320 is installed.)
The installation of the driver is completed.
Restart the system when prompted to do so.
237
User Guide
www.bull.com
About Windows Activation
Windows Server 2003 must be activated before you can use Windows Server 2003.
Please follow the process described below.
Note: The activation process is not required for Windows
Server 2003 R2.
1. Click [Run] on [Start] menu.
Type as follows in the [Open:] box, and click [OK].
oobe/msoobe /a
2. Click on [Next] when prompted to do so on the following screen.
The following screen is displayed.
238
User Guide
www.bull.com
3. Process with the "Windows activation" according to the following message.
Available Switch Options for Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini File
Many different switches will be available if you edit Boot.ini file.
For the available switch options, refer to the following information:
■ Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 833721
"Available switch options for the Windows XP and the Windows Server 2003
Boot.ini files"
If your system features more than 4GB of memory, adding /PAE switch in Boot.ini file
will enable the system to be recognized with over 4GB of memory.
However, the Microsoft operating system products which support /PAE switch option
are limited.
Refer to the following article in Microsoft Knowledge Base to check the supported
products.
■ Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 291988
"A description of the 4GB RAM tuning feature and the Physical Address
Extension switch"
Below is the example on how to add /PAE switch to Boot.ini file.
1. Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Control Panel].
2. In [Control Panel], double-click [System].
3. Click the [Advanced] tab, and then click [Settings] under [Setup and
Recovery].
4. Under [System Setup], click [Edit] to open [Boot.ini].
5. Add "/PAE" to [Operating Systems] section in [Boot.ini] file, and then save it.
<Example of Boot.ini file>
239
User Guide
www.bull.com
[boot loader]
timeout=30
default=multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS
[operating systems]
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003" /
fastdetect
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003,
PAE" /fastdetect /PAE
C:\CMDCONS\BOOTSECT.DAT="Microsoft Windows Recovery Console" /
cmdcons
This is the end of editing Boot.ini file.
Note: If you choose one of the items in the "Default
operating system" drop-down list box in [Setup and Recovery]
group box, you can make your system start automatically from
the switch you specified.
Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug
Information)
Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in the corresponding
Appendix.
240
User Guide
www.bull.com
Appendix 5: Installing
Microsoft Windows Server
2003 x64 Editions
This section describes the procedures for installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
without using the Express Setup tool.
Before Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Please read carefully the following information BEFORE beginning your Windows
Server 2003 x64 Editions Installation.
Installing Service Pack
You can install the Service Pack on the server. If the Service Pack is not attached to
your system, prepare it yourself.
Updating System
If you change the configuration of the system, update your system with the
ExpressBuilder CD-ROM delivered with your system.
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded
to Dynamic Disk
If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk
upgraded to Dynamic Disk, note the following issue:
■ Do not select the partition where the operating system had been installed as the
partition to install the operating system newly.
■ Select "Use the current File System" for the format of operating system partition.
Manual Installation when the Disk Array Controllers are Connected
If you keep the disk array controllers connected during the installation process, pop-up
messages may appear. This does not affect the system behavior. Click [YES] and
continue the installation.
241
User Guide
www.bull.com
Magneto-Optical device
If you specify the file system as NTFS with a MO Device connected during the
installation, the file system will not be converted normally. Disconnect the MO device
and restart the installation from the beginning.
Media such as DAT
Do not connect such devices to the server before installing the operating system.
Floppy Disk Drive
No internal floppy disk drive is included in your system. Prepare an optional USB
floppy disk drive if necessary.
242
User Guide
www.bull.com
Partition Size
The minimum size for the partition on which the system is to be installed can be
calculated from the following formula.
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size +
Application Size
Size necessary to install the system= 4100 MB
Paging File Size (Recommended)= Mounted Memory Size × 1.5
Dump file Size= Mounted Memory Size + 1 MB
Application Size = Required Size
Caution
■ The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for
collecting debug information (memory dump). A paging file
with an initial size large enough to store the dump file in the
boot drive is required.
It may be impossible to collect correct debugging information
due to a virtual memory shortage if the paging file is insufficient, so we recommend you set a paging file large enough
for the entire system.
■ The dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory mounted is ‘2048MB + 1MB’.
■ If you install any application program or the like, add necessary space to the partition to install these programs.
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512 MB, the minimal size of the partition
will be calculated by the above formula as follows:
4100 MB + (512 MB * 1.5) + (512 MB + 1 MB) + Application Size = 5381 MB +
Application Size
If the required partition size is larger than the size of a hard disk drive, we recommend
you split the file across several disks.
1. Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".
2. Set the debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) so that it is
written to a separate disk.
(If necessary, install an additional new disk.)
243
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installing Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64
Editions
You will need the following for the installation of the Windows Server 2003 x64
Editions:
■ ExpressBuilder CD-ROM
■ Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions (CD-ROM)
■ User's Guide
■ Getting Started
■ Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder
Before installing, create Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions OEM-DISK for
ExpressBuilder.
Creating "Windows 2003 x64 EditionsOEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder"
You can create the Windows 2003 x64 Editions OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder using
one of the following two procedures:
Creating from the menu which appears when running BULL NovaScale Server with
ExpressBuilder
Use this procedure if you have only the BULL NovaScale Server to create the
Windows 2003 OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder.
■ If you have only the BULL NovaScale Server to create the Windows Server 2003
x64 Editions OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder, use this procedure.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Prepare a 3.5-inch floppy disks.
Turn on your BULL NovaScale Server.
Insert the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM in the optical device drive.
Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reboot the server. (You may also turn off and then
on again to reboot the server.)
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and the ExpressBuilder starts.
Select [Create Support Disk] from [Tools].
Select [Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder]
from the [Create Support Disk] menu.
Insert a diskette in the floppy disk drive according to the on-screen instruction.
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder will be
created.
Write-protect and label the diskette, then keep it in a safe place.
244
User Guide
www.bull.com
Creating Windows 2003 OEM-DISK from [Master Control Menu]
Use this procedure if Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions or Windows 2000 can be
operated on BULL NovaScale Server.
[Master Control Menu] runs on the following operating systems.
- Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
- Windows Server 2003
- Windows 2000
- Windows Me/98/95
- Windows NT 4.0
- Windows XP x64 Edition
- Windows XP
You can create the Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions OEM-DISK for
ExpressBuilder from [Master Control Menu], if you have the computer on which
one of the above operating system operates.
Follow the steps below:
1. Prepare a 3.5-inch floppy disks.
2. Run the operating system.
3. Insert the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM in the optical device drive.
[Master Control Menu] is displayed.
4. Click [Setup] with the left mouse button, click [Make OEM-DISK] and then
[for Windows Server 2003 x64].
Note: You can do the same operation using the menu
displayed by a right-click.
5. Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message.
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder will be
created.
6. Write-protect and label the diskette, then keep it safely.
245
User Guide
www.bull.com
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003 x64
Editions.
1. Turn the system on.
2. Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions CD-ROM in the optical device
drive.
3. Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.
After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk, press
Enter while the message "Press any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at the
top of the screen.
If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk, this step is
unnecessary.
The Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions setup screen will be displayed. If the
screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.
Retry after turning the system off and then on again.
4. If a RAID or SCSI controller is installed, press F6 in a few seconds when the
window is in one of the following states:
– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration..." is displayed.
– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.
Note: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has
been pressed.
5. When the following message is displayed, press S.
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.
The following message is then displayed.
Please inert the disk labeled
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk
into Drive A:
*Press ENTER when ready.
246
User Guide
www.bull.com
6. Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder
into the floppy drive, and press Enter.
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.
7. Select the [LSI Logic Fusion-MPT SAS Driver (Server 2003 x64) ] and press
Enter.
8. Select the driver according to your configuration (embedded or external
adapter).
9. When prompted to do so, press Enter to start the "Welcome to Setup" wizard.
Once the installation of Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition is finished, the
system reboots automatically.
10. The [Windows Setup] screen will be displayed once logged on to the system.
Caution
■ In some cases, the [Windows Setup] screen may not be displayed. However, make sure to install Microsoft Windows
Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 according to the following procedures.
■ Make sure you install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2
DISC 2 after the application of "System update". In this case,
note that the [Windows Setup] screen is not displayed.
11. Insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition DISC 2 CD-ROM into
the DVD-ROM drive. Confirm the parameters and click [OK].
12. When the installation has completed, remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003
R2 x64 Edition DISC 2 CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive, and restart the
system.
247
User Guide
www.bull.com
Reinstallation to Multiple Logical drives
This section describes the procedure for reinstalling the operation system if the
multiple logical drives exist.
Before Re-installing the Operation System
Be sure to make backup copies before re-installing the operation system just in case.
Re-installing the Operation System
1. Start the clean installation following the procedure described in this guide.
2. Specify the partition in which you want to install the operating system when
the following message appears:
The following list shows the existing partitions and unpartitioned space on this
computer.
Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list.
* Cannot modify the drive letter of your system or boot volume. Confirm the
proper drive letter is assigned and then, continue the setup.
3. Continue the clean installation following the procedure described earlier in this
chapter.
* The drive letter of the re-installed system may differ from the one of the
previous system. If you need to modify the drive letter, follow the procedure
"Modifying the Drive Letter".
Modifying the Drive Letter
Be careful that the drive letter of the system or boot volume cannot be modified with
the following procedure.
1. Click Start menu, right-click [My Computer], and specify [Manage] to start
[Computer Management].
2. Specify the [Disk Management] in the left side of the window.
3. Right-click the volume for which you want to modify the drive letter and
specify the [Change Drive Letter and Path...].
4. Click [Yes].
5. Choose the [Assign a drive letter] and specify the drive letter you want to
assign.
6. Click [OK].
7. If the following message appears, click [Yes]:
Changing the drive letter of a volume may cause programs to no longer run.
Are you sure you want to change this drive letter?
8. Close the [Computer Management].
248
User Guide
www.bull.com
Updating the System
To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following
procedures.
1. Logon to the system using the administrator account or other account which is
a member of the Administrators group.
2. Insert the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM into the optical device drive.
[Master Control Menu] is displayed on the screen.
3. Click [Setup] with the left mouse button and click U [Update BULL NovaScale
system] section.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to continue system update.
5. Click [OK] to restart the system, and immediately remove the ExpressBuilder
CD-ROM from the optical device drive.
Caution
If you change the configuration of the system (by adding or
removing hardware or Operating system software components)
or repair the system, you must run the system update again.
249
User Guide
www.bull.com
Driver Installation and Device Settings
This section describes how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the
device.
For information on installing and setting up a driver that is not described in this section,
please refer to the document delivered with the driver.
PROSet
PROSet is a utility that checks the function of network contained in the network driver.
Using PROSet enables the following items:
■ Verify detailed information of the adapter.
■ Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.
■ Setup of teaming.
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant
environment on any trouble and enhance throughput between the switches.
PROSet is necessary to use these features.
To install PROSet:
1. Insert the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM into the optical device drive.
2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.
c. In the case of the standard start menu, click Start menu and click
[Windows Explorer].
d. In the case of the classic start menu, click Start menu, point to
[Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3. Run "PROSet.exe" in the following directory:
<DVD-ROM driveLetter>:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS4\PROSet\WS3XPX64
The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.
4. Click [Next].
5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].
6. Choose "Complete" and click [Next].
7. Click [Install].
8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].
9. Restart the system.
Network Driver
Specify the details of network driver.
The standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically, but the
link speed and duplex mode need to be specified manually.
IP addresses cannot be set when the "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" check box is OFF.
Check ON the "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" check box to be able to set IP addresses.
250
User Guide
www.bull.com
[When PROSet is not installed]
1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box is displayed.
■ Procedure with the standard start menu: click Start menu, [Control
Panel], [Network Connections], and [Local Area Connection].
■ Procedure with the classic start menu:
a. Click Start menu, Click [Settings] and Click [Network Connections].
The [Network Connections] dialog box is displayed.
b. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from popup menu.
2. Click [Configure].
The property dialog box for the network adapter is displayed.
3. Click [Advanced] and specify the same value for [Link Speed & Duplex] and
for the HUB.
4. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.
[When PROSet is installed]
[When PROSet is installed]
1. The [Intel PROSet] dialog box appears.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel], [Administrative tools], and
click [Computer Management] and then double click the [(Network
Adapter Name)] in the Network Adapter list.
* Procedure with the classic start menu
a. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].
b. Click [Administrative tools].
c. Click [Computer Management] and double click the [(Network Adapter
Name)] in the Network Adapter list.
2. Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.
3. Click the [Link] and specify the [Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value
specified for HUB.
4. Click [Apply] and click [OK].
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which
can be displayed from [Network and Dial-up Connection].
Note: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at
[AddingServices]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (or
the packet) that the computer installing [Network Monitor] sends
or receives. This tool is valuable when analyzing network
trouble. For information on how to install the tool, see the
"Setup for TroubleProcess" later in this document.
251
User Guide
www.bull.com
5. Check the [Include this location in the search] check box and and specifiy the
correct path. See “Check the [Include this location in the search] check box
and and specifiy the correct path. See .” on page 252.
6. Click [Next].
7. Click [Finish].
Re-install the Network Driver
The network driver will be installed automatically.
Optional Network Board Driver
If you want to use an optional Network Board (Gigabit adapter), the network driver
will be installed automatically. Therefore, the driver attached to the Network board
should not be used. If necessary, install the driver stored in ExpressBuilder CD-ROM.
When using 100BASE TX adapters:
"DVD-ROM drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS4\PRO100\WS3XPX64"
When using 1000BASE T adapters:
"DVD-ROM drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS4\PRO1000\WS3XPX64"
If the installation procedure is not clear, refer to the installation procedure described in
the section "Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver".
Installing the Optional Network Board Driver
1. Start Device Manager.
2. Click [Network adapters] and Double-Click [(Network Adapter Name)].
[(Network Adapter Name) Properties] is displayed.
Note: [(Intel(R) PRO/1000...)] is the name of On-Board
adapter. All other names show the Optional Network Board.
3. Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...].
[Hardware Update Wizard] is displayed.
4. Select the [Install from a list or specific location(Advanced)] radio button and
click [Next].
5. Select the [Search for the best driver in these locations] radio button and check
off the [Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box.
252
User Guide
www.bull.com
6. Check the [Include this location in the search] check box and specifiy the
correct path. See “Optional Network Board Driver” on page 252.
7. Click [Next].
8. Click [Finish].
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT)/Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB)
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT) is a feature that creates a group containing more than
one adapter and converts the process of the working adapter to the other adapter in the
group when any trouble occurred on that adapter.
Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB) is a feature that creates a group containing more than
one adapter and enhance the through put by operating packet transmission from the
server by all the adapters.
This feature includes AFT feature.
Caution
■ AFT/ALB setup must be operated after installing the drivers
and restarting the system.
■ All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teaming
must exist on the same LAN. If they are connected to the
separate switches, they will not work normally.
If you want to use AFT/ALB feature:
1. Open the Teaming Wizard.
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel], [administrative tools], and
click [Computer Management] and then double click the [(Network
Adapter Name)] in the Network Adapter list.
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu
a. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].
b. Click [Administrative Tools].
c. Click [Computer Management] and double click the [(Network Adapter
Name)] in the Network Adapter list.
2. Select [Teaming] tab and then check on [Team with other adapters] and click
[New Team...].
The [New Team Wizard] dialog box appears. Click [Next]. (Specify a name for
the team if it necessary.)
253
User Guide
www.bull.com
3. Select the adapters to include in the team.
4. Select "Adapter Fault Tolerance" or "Adaptive Load Balancing" and click
[Next].
5. Check the adapter to join the team and click [Next].
6. Click [Finish].
7. The setup will go back to [Intel(R) PROSet for Wired Connections] dialog box,
so click [OK].
8. Restart the system.
Graphics Accelerator Driver
The drivers for the graphics accelerator cards that are installed in the server will setup
automatically.
If you remove an additional graphics card, make sure to remove its corresponding
driver.
Should it be necessary to install manually the drivers, follow the procedure below.
If you want to use an optional graphics acceletaror card, setup the card according to
what is written in the card’s documentation.
1. Insert the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
2. Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows
Explorer]
3. Run "SETUP.EXE" in the following directory.
To install a standard graphics accelerator driver:
<DVD-ROM
drive
Letter>:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\VIDEO\MATROX/
SETUP.EXE
To install a graphics accelerator ATI RN50 driver:
<DVD-ROM
drive
Letter>:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\VIDEO\ES1000/
SETUP.EXE
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to continue the installation. If a message
“Digital signature could not be found” appears, select Yes to continue.
5. Remove the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive, follow the
on-screen directions and restart the system.
Installing SCSI Controller Drivers
Update the drivers for your system using the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM shipped with
your system.
The SCSI drivers will be installed automatically.
Installing a Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 114, SecuRAID
121)
To install these controllers on a system running under Windows Server 2003, connect
the controller and take the following steps to install the driver:
254
User Guide
www.bull.com
1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel] →
[Administrative Tools] → [Computer Management].
2. Double-click [LSI Logic Megaraid SCSI 320-1/2] which Device Manager lists.
3. Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...].
4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or
specific location [Advanced]" and click [Next].
5. Select the "Search for the best driver in these locations." and check the "Search
removable media [floppy, CD-ROM...]" check box.
6. Insert "Windows Server 2003 x64 OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder" into the
floppy disk drive, and click [Next].The drivers are copied.
7. The [Completing the Hardware Update Wizard] dialog box appears. Click
[Finish].
255
User Guide
www.bull.com
Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug
Information)
Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in the corresponding
section.
256
User Guide
www.bull.com
Appendix 6: Installing and
Using Utilities
This section describes how to use the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM that comes with your
server and to install the utilities stored on the ExpressBuilder.
257
User Guide
www.bull.com
ExpressBuilder
ExpressBuilder is an automated software integration tool that helps simplify the
process of installing and configuring your server. It provides a flexible, guided
installation process for system administrators to install Microsoft® Windows® 2000 or
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003.
To install other operating systems, please contact your service representative for more
information on the operating systems certified on the server.
Note: Before using ExpressBuilder for initial setup,
complete the hardware configuration.
ExpressBuilder includes three distinct programs:
■
DOS-based with local console
Used to set up the server at the first time. This program is also used to diagnose the
server and to install/uninstall the management utilities on the maintenance partition
of the system drive.
■
DOS-based with remote console
Used to set up the server from the management workstation by accessing the server
over the network or via serial port B.
Note: The "CSL_LESS.CFG" file is required to run this
program. Refer to “ExpressBuilder for DOS-based with Remote
Console” on page 264 for more information.
258
User Guide
■
www.bull.com
Windows-based
This program is called "Master Control Menu" and runs under the Microsoft
Windows system (Windows 95 or later and Windows NT 4.0 or later). You can
install the several applications and read the documentation from this menu.
ExpressBuilder for DOS-Based with Local Console
This subsection describes the procedures necessary to use ExpressBuilder for DOSbased with local console.
Starting ExpressBuilder
The following procedure instructs you to start ExpressBuilder.
Caution
Do not remove the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM while ExpressBuilder is running.
1.
Turn on first the peripheral devices and then the server.
259
User Guide
www.bull.com
2.
3.
4.
Insert the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM supplied with your server into the DVDROM drive of your server.
Ensure that the floppy disk drive is empty.
Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot from the
ExpressBuilder. (You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)
ExpressBuilder boots up displaying the top menu.
Express Setup
"Express Setup" is intended for the initial setup of the server. Its automatic installation
mode guides the user easily through the process by detailing specific hardware features
and providing screen prompts for software selection and configuration. The program
loads the utilities and drivers, applies RAID settings, partitions the disk, and installs the
desired operating system.
If you install Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000, after a few tasks are completed,
all that remains to be done is to remove the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM, insert the
Windows CD-ROM, input a product ID number, and acknowledge the license
agreement.
Caution
■ The Express Setup does not support the installation of Windows server x64 Editions.
■ The Express Setup is intended for the initial setup of the
server system and, therefore, the Express Setup clears the
contents of the hard disk.
260
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ If applicable, once the Express setup has started, do not
remove the "Configuration Diskette" from the floppy disk
drive until you are asked to do so.
Tools
"Tools" is also intended for initial setup of the server. It allows additional installation
options and allows the user to quickly create utility support disks, run the Off-line
Maintenance Utility and system diagnostic utility, set up a maintenance partition, and
update the various BIOS programs.
Table 30: Tools Menu
Tools Menu
Save/Restore RAID Configuration Data
RAID Board: None
Off-line Maintenance Utility
System Diagnostics
Server Management Board:
None
Create Support Disk
System Configuration: None
Setup Maintenance Partition
BIOS/FW/etc. Update
Initialize Remote Management Card
System Management
Help
Return to the Top Menu
■ Save/Restore RAID Configuration Data
The item allows the configuration information on the disk array system to be saved
or restored from the floppy disk.
- Save Disk Array Configuration Data
The configuration information on the disk mirroring controller is saved into the
floppy disk. If you set or change RAID, always use this function to save the
configuration information into a floppy disk.
Warning
Some Disk Array Controllers do not support this function. In
that case, this menu will not be shown.
261
User Guide
www.bull.com
- Restore Disk Array Configuration Data
The configuration information saved in a floppy disk is restored to NVRAM and
hard disk on the disk mirroring controller.
If the configuration information is broken or changed by mistake, restore the
configuration information.
When the defective disk array controller is replaced, the configuration information
on the hard disk must be saved into the disk array controller.
However, if the configuration information on the new disk mirroring controller is
saved into a hard disk, use this function to restore the configuration information.
Warning
■ Some Disk Array Controllers do not support this function. In
that case, this menu will not be shown.
■ Please do not use this function, except for maintenance.
■ Off-line Maintenance Utility
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is an OS-independent maintenance program that
performs preventive maintenance and error analysis for your server. See the online
help for details.
■ System Diagnostics
Executes various tests on the server system to check if the server functions are
normal and if the connection between the server and additional board is normal.
After the System Diagnostics is executed, a system check program assigned to
each model starts.
■ Create Support Disk
The ExpressBuilder CD-ROM contains a number of device drivers and utilities
that you can put on floppy disks and load onto your system.
Use this menu to create a support disk by copying from the ExpressBuilder CDROM. If your system is running a Windows operating system, you may find it
more convenient to use ExpressBuilder for Windows-based to make support disks
Write the displayed title on the floppy disk label, which is useful for management
in the future. Customers are to provide a floppy disk to create a support disk.
- Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder
Creates a support disk used for the installation of Windows Server 2003 x64
Editions.
262
User Guide
www.bull.com
- Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder
Creates a support disk used for the installation of Windows Server 2003 Standard
Edition and Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition. (No need to create this disk
when installing the operating system with the Express Setup.)
- ROM-DOS Startup FD
Creates a support disk used to start the ROM-DOS system.
- Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD
Creates a support disk used to activate the Off-line Maintenance Utility.
■ Setup Maintenance Partition
The Maintenance partition is a specific partition for the server that is created on
your system disk. About 55MB of the maintenance partition includes the various
maintenance utilities and executable commands.
Warning
■ Do not reset or turn off the server while running this menu. If
this process is interrupted, the system will not start anymore.
■ The existence of the maintenance partition may be identified
from the operating system. In order to retain the Configuration Data, do not delete the partition.
Notes:
■ The maintenance partition, once created, cannot be recreated again.
■ When the maintenance partition does not exist, some menu
items do not appear.
- Create Maintenance Partition
ExpressBuilder creates a maintenance partition of about 55MB on the system disk
(or disk array system) as work area. The various utilities are installed when the
maintenance partition is created successfully or when the maintenance partition is
already created.
- Install Maintenance Partition Utilities
Various utilities are installed in the maintenance partition from the CD-ROM.
- Update Maintenance Partition Utilities
263
User Guide
www.bull.com
Various utilities are copied in the Maintenance Partition from the update disk.
This menu is only used when the update disk is supplied from your service
representative or attached with your system.
- FDISK
Executes the FDISK command of the ROM-DOS system. You can create/delete
partitions, etc.
■ BIOS/FW/etc. Update
This menu allows you to update the software module such as BIOS and firmware
of the server by using the update disk (3.5-inch floppy disk) that is distributed from
Bull customer service representative.
After rebooting the system, an update program starts automatically from the floppy
disk, and the various BIOS and firmware programs are updated.
Warning
Do not turn off the server while the update program is running. If
this process is interrupted, the system will not start anymore.
■ Help
Displays explanations about various functions of ExpressBuilder.
■ Return to the Top Menu
Choosing this menu returns to the Top Menu.
ExpressBuilder for DOS-based with Remote Console
This subsection describes the procedures necessary to use ExpressBuilder for DOSbased with remote console.
ExpressBuilder contains the remote console feature that allows the system
administrator to set up the server from the management workstation (management PC)
via the network or the server's COM B (serial) port.
Warning
■ Do not use this feature on any other computer than the
server, or on any other server obtained without ExpressBuilder. Doing so may cause a failure of the server.
■ When a keyboard is connected to the server, the remote
console feature is disabled. (Nothing is displayed on the
management PC.)
264
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ If you fail to configure the disk array controller from the
remote console, try again using the server console.
■ The system may fail to operate with the transfer rate of 115.2
Kbps for serial console redirection. Specify any other transfer rate than 115.2 Kbps.
Starting
The following two methods are available to start the server.
■ Running ExpressBuilder from the management PC via LAN
■ Running ExpressBuilder from the management PC via direct connection (COM B)
For the procedure for starting ExpressBuilder for DOS-based with Remote Console,
see "NEC DianaScope".
Warning
■ Do not change the boot device order in BOOT menu in BIOS
SETUP. ExpressBuilder cannot be used if the DVD-ROM
drive is not the first boot device.
■ To use this feature, you need to create a configuration file
(3.5-inch floppy disk) that includes communication method
between the server and the management PC, and various
setup parameters. Use NEC DianaScope or run the "System
Management" menu from the EXPRESSBUILDER to create
a configuration file. Save the configuration file into the root
directory of the floppy disk with the following file name.
- File name: CSL_LESS.cfg
Notes: The following items of BIOS setup information will be
set as shown below.
■ LAN Controller:[Enabled]
■ Serial Port A:[Enabled]
Base I/O Address:[3F8]
Interrupt:[IRQ 4]
■ Serial Port B:[Enabled]
Base I/O Address:[2F8]
Interrupt:[IRQ 3]
■ BIOS Redirection Port:[Serial B]
■ Baud Rate:[19.2K]
■ Flow Control:[CTS/RTS]
265
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ Console Type:[PC ANSI]
Top Menu
Top menu items are listed below:
■ Setup: automatically sets up the server.
■ Tools: launch the features of ExpressBuilder individually.
■ Help: help message on ExpressBuilder.
■ Quit: quit ExpressBuilder.
Setup
ExpressBuilder checks the hardware configuration of the server. The disk array and
maintenance partition are automatically configured.
Tools
When you select the [Tools] on the Top Menu, the following screen appears.
The menu items available only in remote console operation among those described in
section "ExpressBuilder for DOS-based with Local Console" are displayed. See the
previous subsection for detailed explanation of menu items.
Warning
The following differs from the [Tools] menu in the local console
mode.
■ Test items and operation method of System Diagnostics.
ExpressBuilder for Windows-Based (Master Control Menu)
The Master Control Menu is used to,
266
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ Read the User's Guide or the other documents,
■ Update the BULL NovaScale system, and
■ Install the management software.
Notes:
■ Master Control Menu requires Microsoft Windows 95 (or
later) or Windows NT 4.0 (or later).
■ Some documents are provided in the PDF format. Use the
Adobe Acrobat Reader to read these documents.
Insert the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive, the Master Control
Menu appears on the screen automatically. If the Autorun function is invalid in your
system, run the \MC\1ST.EXE file in the CD-ROM directly. Some items are grayedout when the logon user does not have administrator authority, or if the item is not
proper for the system.
To use Master Control Menu,
■ Click on [Online Document], [Setup] or [Quit], or
■ Click the right mouse button on Master Control Menu window.
267
User Guide
www.bull.com
Configuration Diskette Creator
"Configuration Diskette Creator" is a tool used to create the [Configuration Diskette]
that is used for configuring the server with the Express Setup.
If you use the Configuration Diskette created by the Express Setup and Configuration
Diskette Creator to operate the setup, you can automatically setup the OS and several
utilities, except for a few key inputs required to confirm the specification.
If needed, you can also re-install the system with the same specification. We
recommend you to create a [Configuration Diskette] to setup the servers.
Caution
You cannot create a [Configuration Diskette] for Microsoft Windows server 2003 x64 Editions.
Note: You can install Windows Server 2003 and Windows
2000 without a [Configuration Diskette]. Also, you can modify/
newly create the [Configuration Diskette] during the setup with
ExpressBuilder.
Creating Configuration Diskette
This section describes how to specify setup information required for OS installation
and the creation of the [Configuration Diskette]. Follow the procedure below.
Note: In the procedure below, the folder name that is
specified when installing Trekking command is assumed as
[Configuration Diskette Creator].
1. Start the OS.
268
User Guide
www.bull.com
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Insert the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
Click [Setup] on the Master Control Menu.
Click [Configuration Diskette Creator].
Click [Create New Information files] from the [File] menu.
Specify each item and click [OK].
Follow the on-screen instructions to specify each item on the dialog box and
click [Next].
Note: If you click on [Cancel], all the values already entered
will be deleted.
Once you have finished completing the specification of setup information, the
[Save Setup Information] dialog box will appear.
8. Make sure that the [Configuration Diskette] check box is checked, and type a
file name for the Setup File in [File Name].
9. Insert a 1.44MB floppy disk into the floppy disk drive and click [OK].
The [Configuration Diskette] is created; we recommend you label it and store it in a
safe place. Use it to install Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000.
If you want to modify an existing information file, click [Modify Information Files] on
the Configuration Diskette Creator Window. Refer to the Help file for more
information.
Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver
To install an optional Mass Storage Driver supported by the Express Setup, follow the
procedure below to create a [Configuration Diskette].
1.
2.
3.
4.
Display the Configuration Diskette Creator window.
From the [File] menu, click [Create new information files].
Specify each item and click on [OK].
Follow the message to specify each item on the dialog box and click on [Next].
Note: If you click on [Cancel], all the values already entered
will be deleted.
5. When [User and application setup] is displayed, check [Apply OEM-FD for
mass storage device].
6. When the [Save Setup Information] dialog box is displayed, confirm that the
[Configuration Diskette] check box is checked, and input file name for the
Setup File in [File Name].
7. Insert a 1.44MB floppy disk into the floppy disk drive and click [OK].
269
User Guide
www.bull.com
NEC ESMPRO
NEC ESMPRO lets a system administrator manage remote servers across a network.
NEC ESMPRO monitors server hardware and software configurations, failures, and
performance.
Using the log data collected by NEC ESMPRO, a system administrator can track longterm and short-term performance, monitor server usage, create graphs to record trends,
and check server failure rates. The administrator can use the information collected to
create more efficient data routing procedures and optimize the server usage.
Note: For installation procedure and detailed explanations
on NEC ESMPRO, refer to the online documentation provided
on the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM.
Functions and Features
NEC ESMPRO offers many functions and features for managing remote servers across
a network. These features help the system administrator perform daily system
operation, system extension, and transfer tasks. Some features of NEC ESMPRO
Manager include:
■ Hardware and software server configuration
- Hardware resources mounted in servers, such as the CPU, memory, disks, disk
arrays, and LAN boards.
- Software resources, such as operating system information and the drivers running on each server.
■ Server failures
- On-screen real-time displays provide the system administrator with the failure
type, location, cause, and suggested corrective action.
- Failure data includes hardware failure information such as system board temperature, memory failure, crashes, and software failure information.
■ Performance
- NEC ESMPRO monitors server performance and displays server usage on the
screen and displays information, such as the rate of CPU load, memory usage,
disk usage, and LAN traffic. Usage threshold values can help the system
administrator monitor and prevent server overloads.
Note: For the installation procedure and detailed
explanations on NEC ESMPRO, refer to the online
documentation provided on the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM.
270
User Guide
www.bull.com
Power Console Plus
Power Console Plus is a utility used to control the RAID system of the disk array
controllers (SecuRAID) produced by LSI Logic.
Using Power Console Plus enables operations (e.g., monitoring and maintenance) of
RAID systems that are constructed on local Express servers and Express servers
connected through networks (TCP/IP). The operations can be done online on graphical
screens without the system being stopped.
Major Functions
Power Console Plus provides the following features:
■ Support for the Wizard function in order to facilitate configuration
■ Makes it possible to change of RAID levels
■ Compatible with SAF-TE
■ Performance monitor support
■ Supports enclosure functions such as temperature monitoring, power monitoring,
and fan monitoring
■ Enables the settings of Write, Read, and Cache policies for each logical drive
■ Supports the save and restore functions for configuration
■ Enables the display of the SCSI transfer rate
Components
Power Console Plus consists of the following five components:
■ SNMP Agent (not supported)
■ MegaRAID Service Monitor
Enables NEC ESMPRO to monitor the SecuRAID controller by registering event
logs. Install MegaRAID Service Monitor in the Express server in which the
SecuRAID controller is mounted.
■ MegaRAID Client
Controls the RAID system on graphical screens. Install MegaRAID Client in the
Express server in which the SecuRAID controller mounted or in the management
PC that is connected through the Express server and network.
■ MegaRAID Server
Enables control of the SecuRAID controller via the network. Install MegaRAID
Server in the Express server in which the SecuRAID controller mounted.
■ MegaRAID Registration Server
271
User Guide
www.bull.com
Enables control of the SecuRAID controller via the network. Install in one of
Express servers and management PCs that are connected through network. The
above components must be installed correctly for establishing the environment to
use Power Console Plus.
Power Console Plus components to be installed are different between the target servers
and management PC.
■ Server (Express server in which the SecuRAID controller is mounted):
Install the following three components in this server:
- MegaRAID Service Monitor
- MegaRAID Server
- MegaRAID Client
■ Management PC (Management PC that monitors and controls servers via the TCP/
IP network)
When managing array on Terminal Server working on Windows NT Server
Version 4.0 Terminal Server Edition, prepare PC, and install Management PC
component. Management PC does not guarantee operation on Client, which used
Terminal Server, Terminal Server Emulator, WBT.
Start Power Console Plus of management PC, after the Power On machine that
installed "Server" and "Management Server".
Install the following component in this PC:
- MegaRAID Client
■ Management server (Machine that manages all servers that are monitored and
controlled by management PCs):
Install the following component in one of the servers or management PCs:
- MegaRAID Registration Server
Server Setup
This section explains the Power Console Plus setup in the Express server in which the
SecuRAID controller is mounted.
Operating Environment
■ Hardware
- Machine: BULL NovaScale series connected with the AMI disk array controller
(A)
- Memory: Size large enough for OS operation + 8MB or more
- Free space of the hard disk: 5MB or more
- Display unit: Screen size 1024 × 768 or larger
272
User Guide
www.bull.com
- Required peripheral equipment: Network Interface card, CD-ROM unit, Pointing device such as a mouse
■ Software
- Microsoft Windows NT version 4.0 (Windows NT Version 4.0 Service Pack 6a
or later + Internet Explorer 5.5 or later)
- Microsoft Windows 2000
Management PC Setup
This section explains Power Console Plus setup in a computer that manages servers via
the network (TCP/IP).
Operating Environment
■ Hardware
- Machine: BULL NovaScale series, PC/AT-compatible machine (which contains Intel Pentium or a CPU at least equivalent to it)
- Memory: Size large enough for OS operation + 8MB or more
- Free space of the hard disk: 5 MB or more
- Display unit: Screen size 1024 × 768 or larger
- Required peripheral equipment: Network Interface card, CD-ROM unit, Pointing device such as a mouse
■ Software
- Microsoft Windows NT Version 4.0 (Windows NT Version 4.0 Service Pack 5
or later + Internet Explorer 4.01 Service Pack 2 or later)
- Microsoft Windows 2000
- Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me
273
User Guide
www.bull.com
NEC DianaScope
NEC DianaScope is a software used for the remote management of the BULL
NovaScale series.
See the online documents for details on the functions and installation of NEC
DianaScope.
Note: You need the server license to activate NEC
DianaScope for this product.
274
User Guide
www.bull.com
MegaRAID Storage ManagerTM (Server)
MegaRAID Storage Manager™ (hereinafter abbreviated to MSM) is the application
used to manage or monitor the LSI Logic embedded or additional controllers. You can
use MSM for management of arrays and error notification by event monitoring while
the system is running.
Before attempting to operate MSM, read the "MegaRAID Storage Manager™ User's
Guide" included in ExpressBuilder CD-ROM. The manual explains the MSM
installation procedure and notes on operating MSM.
Setup with Express Setup
You can install MSM with Express Setup contained in the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM.
When you start the Express Setup, a dialog to specify an application appears. Select
[MSM] on the dialog.
Manual Setup
See the online document "MegaRAID Storage Manager™ User's Guide contained in
ExpressBuilder CD-ROM for details.
MegaRAID Storage ManagerTM (Management PC)
Install the MegaRAID Storage Manager‘ (hereinafter abbreviated to MSM) in a
management PC that manages servers via the network.
Before attempting to operate MSM, read the "MegaRAID Storage Manager‘ User's
Guide" included in ExpressBuilder CD-ROM. The manual explains the MSM
installation procedure and notes on operating MSM.
275
User Guide
www.bull.com
Appendix 7: Installing
the Operating System
with Express Setup
This section describes information on using Express Setup to install and configure the
following operating systems to the server:
■ Microsoft® Windows® Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition / Microsoft® Windows®
Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
■ Microsoft® Windows® Server 2003 Standard Edition / Microsoft® Windows®
Server 2003 Enterprise Edition
To use the server with the other operating systems described in this section, contact
your service representative.
Caution
Before installing the operating system, adjust the system date
and time by using the BIOS setup utility "SETUP". See “BIOS
Setup Utility” on page 68.
276
User Guide
www.bull.com
About Express Setup
"Express Setup" contained in your ExpressBuilder CD-ROM is intended for initial
setup of the server. Its automatic installation mode guides the user easily through the
process by detailing specific hardware features and providing screen prompts for
software selection and configuration. The program loads the utilities and drivers,
applies RAID settings, partitions the disk, and installs the desired operating system.
Caution
Express Setup is intended for the initial setup of the server system. Therefore, it clears the contents of the hard disk.
You can also use "Configuration diskette Creator" at "Express Setup" in order to save
or backup parameters for installation.
The Configuration disk is able to have some parameters files that include the
configuration information for the server setup.
If you want to set up the server as before, execute the Express Setup with the
parameters file you used at the time of the initial setup.
Notes:
■ The parameters file is not mandatory to set up the system.
■ If you want to create a parameters file, have a blank floppy
disk (MS-DOS 1.44MB format) ready.
277
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ If you want to use the drivers located on the "OEM-Disk for
Mass Storage Device" that ships with optional boards, a
parameters file is mandatory.
■ You can create a parameters file in advance using "Configuration Diskette Creator" included in ExpressBuilder.
"Configuration Diskette Creator" has a function of "Mass installation". You can
replicate configuration files and modify a replicated file by using this function,
depending on individual server systems.
278
User Guide
www.bull.com
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
This subsection provides information on installing Microsoft® Windows® Server
2003 in the server. Read instruction in this section before proceeding with the
installation.
Note:
■ Express Setup does not support the installation of Windows
Server x64 Editions. See “Installing Microsoft Windows
Server 2003 x64 Editions” on page 244 for more information.
■ If you install Windows Server 2003 without using Express
Setup, see “Appendix 4: Installing Microsoft Windows Server
2003” on page 224.
Installation Notice
Read these precautions before installing Windows Server 2003.
Supported Operating System on this Model
Express Setup supports the installation of the following Windows 2003 editions:
■ Microsoft® Windows® Server 2003 Standard Edition / Microsoft® Windows®
Server 2003 Enterprise Edition (hereinafter, referred to as "Windows Server
2003")
■ Microsoft® Windows® Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition / Microsoft®
Windows® Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition (hereinafter, referred to as
"Windows Server 2003")
Note: Express Setup does not support the installation of
Windows Server x64 Editions. If you want to install it, see
“Installing Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions” on
page 244.
If you wish to install another operating system, contact your sales dealer or the
maintenance service representative.
Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver
To install optional mass storage driver, see "Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver"
of "Configuration Diskette Creator" to create setup inf file.
BIOS Settings
Before installing Windows Server 2003, check that the BIOS specification of the
hardware is correct.
279
User Guide
www.bull.com
NEC ESMPRO Agent
On Windows Server 2003 systems, the NEC ESMPRO Agent needs the necras.sys
driver. To install the necras.sys, run the System update from ExpressBuilder CD-ROM.
Floppy Disk Drive
No internal floppy disk drive is included in your system. Prepare an optional USB
floppy disk drive if necessary.
Windows Server 2003
Express Setup can install the Windows Server 2003 operating system. However, note
the following restrictions:
Caution
■ Before starting the installation, complete all the process of
adding the optional device and the setup of Express server
mainframe (BIOS and optional board specification)
■ After completing Express Setup, see "Setup for Solving
Problems" described later to specify the settings for trouble
recovery such as "Specifying Memory Dump".
Installing on the Mirrored Volume
If you want to install Windows Server 2003 on the volume that is mirrored using "Disk
Management", disable the mirroring before operating the installation to set back to the
basic disk, and enable the mirroring again after the installation has completed.
Creating, invalid, delete mirror volume can be operated from "Disk Management" in
"Computer Management".
Connecting a Magneto-Optical Device
Connect the magneto-optical device after the operating system has been successfully
installed.
Connecting Medias such as DATs
Connect any drives that are not mandatory after the operating system has been
successfully installed.
Connecting Hard Disk Drive
Connect additional hard disks after the operating system has been successfully
installed.
280
User Guide
www.bull.com
Creating Partition Size
The minimum size for the partition where the system is to be installed can be calculated
from the following formula.
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size
Size necessary to install the system=
3500 MB (Windows Server 2003 + Service Pack 1)
3500 MB (Windows Server 2003 R2)
4400 MB (Windows Server 2003 + Service Pack 1 CD-ROM)
Paging File Size (Recommended)= Mounted Memory Size × 1.5
Dump file Size= Mounted Memory Size + 12 MB
Application size = Required size
Caution
■ The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for
collecting debug information (memory dump). A paging file
with an initial size large enough to store the dump file in the
boot drive is required.
It may be impossible to collect correct debugging information
due to a virtual memory shortage if the paging file is insufficient, so we recommend you set a paging file large enough
for the entire system.
■ The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is 4095 MB. If the above paging file size exceeds
4095 MB, specify 4095 MB for the paging file size.
■ The maximum dump file size for the system with more than
2 GB memory mounted is '2048 MB + 12 MB'.
■ If you install any application program or the like, add necessary space to the partition to install these programs.
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512 MB, the minimally required partition
size will be calculated by the above formula as follows:
3500 MB + (512 MB * 1.5) + (512 MB + 12 MB) + Application size = 4792 MB +
Application size
If the required partition size is larger than the size of a hard disk drive, we recommend
you split the file across several disks.
1. Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".
281
User Guide
www.bull.com
2. Set the debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) so that it is
written to a separate disk.
(If necessary, install an additional new disk.)
Re-installing to the hard disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic
Disk
You cannot re-install Windows Server 2003 with the current partition of the hard disk
upgraded to Dynamic Disk.
If you want to keep the current partition, see “Appendix 4: Installing Microsoft
Windows Server 2003” on page 224 in order to re-install the system.
About the Maintenance Partition (area displayed as “MAINTE P”)
The maintenance partition (used for server maintenance) is reserved in the head of
Hard Disk Drive (size of approximately 55MB).
This area is used for saving some maintenance utilities.
Do not delete the maintenance partition.
Application of Service Pack
The ServicePack 1 is mandatory to use Windows Server 2003 with this equipment.
When installing Windows Server 2003 R2, it is not necessary to apply Service Pack 1.
282
User Guide
www.bull.com
Setup Flow
This section visually describes the flow of the setup operated by Express Setup.
: Process that continues automatically
: Process that need to input or select
Read notes and restrictions.
Go back
Confirmed
Select how to install
No
Yes
Insert floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.
Confirmed
Select Setup Parameter File.
Terminate
New File
Select OS
Retrieve
again
Existing File
Check Setup Parameter File
If you need to
reset the
specification
Correct
Incorrect
Confirm the
setting/select whether
or not to modify
Yes
No
Confirm the specification and input the value.
OK
Insert Windows CD-ROM
Agree Software License Agreement
Express Setup
↓
Log on Automatically
After restarting the
computer, the installation
completed.
*1
*2
Re-select
Disk Array Configuration *1
↓
Restart
↓
Creating Maintenance Partition
↓
Restart
↓
Installing Utilities
↓
Restart
↓ *2
Creating OS Partition
↓
Restart
↓
Formatting OS Partition
↓
Copying NEC Modules
↓
Copying Selected Application Modules
The process is operated only when Disk Array Controller Board is connected and the configuration is specified.
If you select [Others], the process is completed here.
283
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installing Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Express Setup proceeds the setup by specifying the necessary information on the
wizard. You can also save the setup information created on the wizard in a floppy disk
as a setup file.
Note:
■ Prepare a floppy disk to use as Configuration Disk if you
want to save the parameters or use the drivers located on
the "OEM-Disk for Mass Storage Device" that ships with
optional boards. When using the floppy disk, the Express
setup can continue the setup without any need for you to
specify the parameters.
■ The remote KVM console cannot use the mouse during
steps 1 to 14. Use the keyboard.
Right arrow key: Used to move to the next screens.
Left arrow key: Used to return to the previous screen.
Up/Down arrow keys: Used to select a menu.
F1 key: Displays help.
ENTER key: Used to select [OK] or to decide each item.
ESC key: Used to select [Cancel].
1. Turn the power of peripheral devices on, and then turn on the server.
Note:
■ If you operate installing Windows Server 2003 with a Magneto-Optical device connected, the installation may not be
complete successfully. In such a case, detach the MO
device and then re-install the system from the beginning.
■ Install the OS before connecting another hard disk drive.
■ If you create multiple logical drives in your system, refer to
“Reinstallation to Multiple Logical drives” on page 232.
284
User Guide
www.bull.com
2. Insert ExpressBuilder CD-ROM into the optical device drive.
3. Ensure that the floppy disk drive is empty.
4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot from
ExpressBuilder. (You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)
The system boots from the CD-ROM and ExpressBuilder starts.
Caution
Express Setup overwrites the contents of your hard disk. If you
have data you want to keep, follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Click [Express Setup].
When asked if you intend to use a Configuration Diskette or Parameters File,
choose either Yes or No.
6. Read the on-screen message carefully and click [OK].
Note: If an operating system is already installed on the hard
disk, you will be prompted to confirm that you want to proceed
with the installation.
7. The message "Insert Configuration Diskette" appears. If applicable, insert
"Configuration Diskette" into floppy disk drive and click [OK].
Note: If you do not have "Configuration Diskette", insert a
blank floppy disk formatted by 1.44 MB into the floppy disk drive
and click [OK].
285
User Guide
www.bull.com
[Using the specified Configuration Diskette]
The Setup File included in "Configuration Diskette" is displayed.
a. Select the Setup File name to use during the installation.
Note: If there is any problem that can not be modified in the
Setup File you selected, the message to set another
"Configuration Diskette" appears. In such case, verify the
floppy disk you inserted.
After the Setup File is specified, the message "Are you sure you want to
modify the information?" is displayed.
b. If you want to edit the information file, click [Modify]. If you do not
want to edit the information file and continue the installation, click
[Skip].
- Click [Modify]. Go to step 8.
- Click [Skip]. Go to step 12.
[Using Blank disk]
a. Click the box under [Setup File Name: (A)] or press A.
The input box appears.
b. Input a file name. and click [Use]
c. [Operating System to Install] appears.
The OS supported by the computer is displayed in the list.
d. Select [Windows Server 2003] you want to install from the list box.
8. Verify the contents specified during OS installation.
If you are using a blank floppy disk or if you have chosen to review/change
parameters, a series of configuration file screens is displayed as described
below.
If you have a RAID board installed, the [Configure RAID] screen displays
first. Confirm the parameters, modify if necessary, and then click [OK].
The Express Setup automatically performs the RAID configuration, creating
Maintenance partition and installing several utilities.
Note: If you have RAID hardware installed or the onboard
RAID controller is enabled, and the [Configure RAID] screen
fails to display, you must solve the RAID problem before you
continue with the installation.
If no RAID configuration is set-up, the [Operating System Installation] screen
displays.
9. Select the installing Operating system.
Select "Windows" from the menu.
286
User Guide
www.bull.com
10. Next, the [Basic Information] wizard appears. Confirm the parameters, modify
them if necessary, and then click [Next].
After that, click [Next], [Back], or [Help] on the screen according to your
needs. Modify the parameters anytime it is necessary.
287
User Guide
www.bull.com
Caution
■ Reserve the partition to install the OS more than the minimally required size.
■ If you select "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID
Configuration", the information included in the first partition
(excluding maintenance partition) will all be formatted and
deleted. The information included in the other partition will
be retained. The figure below describes the partition which
information will be deleted when maintenance partition
exists.
First Partition
<Maintenance Partition>
Retained
Second
Partition
Deleted
Third
Partition
Retained
Fourth
Partition
Retained
■ You can not re-install the system with the existing partition
that is upgraded to Dynamic Disk remained. Do not select
"Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration".
■ If you specify other than 4095 MB for the "Installing Partition", it is necessary to convert to NTFS.
■ If "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration"
is selected but the partition other than the one to install
Windows Server 2003 does not exist (excluding
maintenance partition), Express Setup will reserve the
maximum area of the hard disk to install Windows Server
2003.
■ You cannot go to the next screen if the specification is incorrect.
■ To specify the setup parameters, the number of characters
must not exceed the limit as shown in the table below. (Double-byte character is counted as 2 characters.)
Table 31: Setup Parameters Maximum Length
Item
Create Users
Create Groups
Value specified
Max number
of characters
User Name
19
Group Name
20
Full Name
63
Explanation
47
Group Name
20
Explanation (Group Name)
47
288
User Guide
www.bull.com
Note: If you press the F9 key in [Role of Computer], the
installation will be done using the default values of Express
Setup for the settings afterwards automatically.
(Only when the [OK] button is displayed in the right side of the
screen).
Once all the specifications are reviewed, the system reboots.
11. Copy the modules for the optional mass storage driver.
If you want to install the optional mass storage driver, insert the floppy disk
corresponding to the mass storage driver into floppy disk drive and follow the
message to operate the installation.
Note: You can use this function only when a floppy disk
drive is attached to the system.
12. Follow the message and take the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM and Configuration
Diskette out of the optical device drive, and insert Windows Server 2003 CDROM into the optical device drive.
[Software License Agreement] screen appears.
13. Read the contents carefully and click [I agree.] or press F8 if you do agree. If
you do not agree, click [I disagree] or press F3.
Caution
■ If you do not agree to this agreement, the setup terminates
and Windows Server 2003 will not be installed.
■ If "NetWare Gateway (and Client) Service" is specified to
install, the window to specify the details of "NetWare Gateway (and Client) Service" pops up on the first logon. Specify
the appropriate value.
14. If you selected [Yes] on [Apply Service Pack] during Basic Information,
remove the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM and insert the Windows Server
2003 Service pack 1 CD-ROM in the optical disc drive when prompted to do
so.
Windows Server 2003 and the specified applications will be installed
automatically. Install and configure the device drivers.
289
User Guide
www.bull.com
Note: About MegaRAID Storage Manager (hereinafter, refered to as "MSM")
When the LSILogic MegaRAID SAS 8408E board is connected,
Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 or later is necessary to
install MSM. When you try to install MSM, and the setting of
whether to apply Service Pack is [No], the following message
will be displayed during the Express Setup.
Service Pack 1 or later is necessary to
continue the instalaltion of MSM
(MegaRAID Storage Manager).
Apply the Service Pack?
* If you click [No], Windows Server
Service pack 1 and MSM will be
installed.
If you click [YES], Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 and
MSM will be installed.
If you click [NO], MSM will not be installed. If you change the
setting of whether to apply Service Pack or not by this message
after you agreed the Software License Agreement, this change
(the setting of whether to install MSM and Service Pack or not)
is not reflected in the parameter file.
Windows Server 2003 and the specified application will be installed
automatically and logon to the system. Install and configure the device drivers.
15. Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 only:
Insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition DISC 2 or
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition DISC 2 into the CDROM drive after the OS installation, and follow the on-screen instructions.
Once the installation is completed, remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003
R2 Standard Edition DISC 2 or Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise
Edition DISC 2 from the optical disc drive, and restart the system.
The Setup using Express Setup has completed.
Installing and Setting Device Drivers
Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers.
PROSet
PROSet is a utility that verifies the function of network contained in network driver.
Using PROSet enables the following items:
■ Verify detailed information of the adapter.
■ Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.
290
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ Setup of teaming.
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant
environment on any trouble and enhance throughput between the switches.
PROSet is necessary to utilize these features.
To install PROSet:
1. Insert the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM into the optical device drive.
2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
Click Start menu and click [Windows Explorer].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click
[Windows Explorer].
3. Run "DXSETUP.EXE" in the following directory.
DVD-ROM driveLetter:\WINNT\DOTNET\NS4\PROSet\2KXPWS03
The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.
4. Click [Next].
5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].
6. Choose "Complete" and click [Next].
7. Click [Install].
8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].
9. Restart the system.
Network Driver
Specify the details of network driver.
One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically, but the
link speed and duplex mode need to be specified manually.
[When PROSet is not installed]
1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box is displayed.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
a. Click Start menu, click [Control Panel], click [Network Connections],
and Click [Local Area Connection].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
a. Click Start menu, click [Settings] and click [Network Connections].
The [Network Connections] dialog box is displayed.
b. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from popup menu.
2. Click [Configure].
The property dialog box for network adapter is displayed.
291
User Guide
www.bull.com
3. Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as
the value specified for HUB.
4. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.
[When PROSet is installed]
1. The [Intel PROSet] dialog box appears.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel], [Administrative tools], and
click [Computer Management] and then double click the [(Network
Adapter Name)] in the Network Adapter list.
* Procedure with the classic start menu
a. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].
b. Click [Administrative tools].
c. Click [Computer Management] and double click the [(Network Adapter
Name)] in the Network Adapter list.
2. Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.
3. Click the [Link] and specify the [Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value
specified for HUB.
4. Click [Apply] and click [OK].
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.
You can process in the property dialog box for local area network which can be
displayed from [Network and Dial-up Connection].
Note: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at
[AddingServices]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (or
the packet)that the computer installing [Network Monitor] sends
or receives. This tool is valuable when analyzing network
trouble. For information on how to install the tool, see the
"Setting for Solving Problems" described later in this chapter.
Optional Network Board Driver
If you want to use an optional Network Board (Gigabit adapter), the network driver
will be installed automatically. Therefore, the driver attached to the Network board
should not be used. If necessary, install the driver stored in ExpressBuilder CD-ROM.
When using 100BASE TX adapters:
"DVD-ROM drive Letter:\WINNT\DOTNET\NS4\PRO100\WS03XP2K"
When using 1000BASE T adapters:
"DVD-ROM drive Letter:\WINNT\DOTNET\NS4\PRO1000\WS03XP2K"
If the installation procedure is not clear, refer to the installation procedure described in
the section "Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver".
292
User Guide
www.bull.com
Installing the Optional Network Board Driver
1. Start Device Manager.
2. Click [Network adapters] and Double-Click [(Network Adapter Name)].
[(Network Adapter Name) Properties] is displayed.
Note: [(Intel(R) PRO/1000...)] is the name of On-Board
adapter. All other names show the Optional Network Board.
3. Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...].
[Hardware Update Wizard] is displayed.
4. Select the [Install from a list or specific location(Advanced)] radio button and
click [Next].
5. Select the [Search for the best driver in these locations] radio button and check
off the [Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box.
293
User Guide
www.bull.com
6. Check the [Include this location in the search] check box and specifiy the
correct path. See “Optional Network Board Driver” on page 292.
7. Click [Next].
8. Click [Finish].
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT)/Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB)
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT) is a feature that creates a group containing more than
one adapter and converts the process of the working adapter to the other adapter in the
group when any trouble occurred on that adapter.
Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB) is a feature that creates a group containing more than
one adapter and enhance the through put by operating packet transmission from the
server by all the adapters.
This feature includes AFT feature.
Caution
■ AFT/ALB setup must be operated after installing the drivers
and restarting the system.
■ All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teaming
must exist on the same LAN. If they are connected to the
separate switches, they will not work normally.
If you want to use AFT/ALB feature:
1. Open the Teaming Wizard.
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel], [administrative tools], and
click [Computer Management] and then double click the [(Network
Adapter Name)] in the Network Adapter list.
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu
a. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].
b. Click [Administrative Tools].
c. Click [Computer Management] and double click the [(Network Adapter
Name)] in the Network Adapter list.
2. Select [Teaming] tab and then check on [Team with other adapters] and click
[New Team...].
The [New Team Wizard] dialog box appears. Click [Next]. (Specify a name for
the team if it necessary.)
294
User Guide
www.bull.com
3. Select the adapters to include in the team.
4. Select "Adapter Fault Tolerance" or "Adaptive Load Balancing" and click
[Next].
5. Check the adapter to join the team and click [Next].
6. Click [Finish].
7. The setup will go back to [Intel(R) PROSet for Wired Connections] dialog box,
so click [OK].
8. Restart the system.
Graphics Accelerator Driver
The drivers for the graphics accelerator cards that are installed in the server will setup
automatically.
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (Adaptec 29160, Adaptec 29320, Ultra SCSI 160,
LSI20320)
Update the drivers for your system using the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM shipped with
your system.
The SCSI drivers will be installed automatically.
Installing a Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 114, SecuRAID 121)
To install these controllers on a system running under Windows Server 2003, connect
the controller and take the following steps to install the driver:
1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel] →
[Administrative Tools] → [Computer Management].
2. Double-click [LSI Logic Megaraid SCSI 320-1/2] which Device Manager lists.
3. Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...].
4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or
specific location [Advanced]" and click [Next].
5. Select the "Search for the best driver in these locations." and check the "Search
removable media [floppy, CD-ROM...]" check box.
6. Insert "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for ExpressBuilder" into the floppy
disk drive, and click [Next].The drivers are copied.
7. The [Completing the Hardware Update Wizard] dialog box appears. Click
[Finish].
Available switch options for Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini file.
Many different switches will be available if you edit Boot.ini file. For the available
switch options, refer to the following information:
■ Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 833721
"Available switch options for the Windows XP and the Windows Server 2003
Boot.ini files"
295
User Guide
www.bull.com
If your system has a memory capacity in excess of 4GB in its installing, adding /PAE
switch in Boot.ini file will enable the system to be installed with over 4GB of memory.
However, the Microsoft operating system products which support /PAE switch option
are limited.
Refer to the following article in Microsoft Knowledge Base to check the supported
products.
■ Microsoft Knowledge Base - Aritcle ID: 291988
"A description of the 4GB RAM tuning feature and the Physical Address
Extension switch"
Below is the example on how to add /PAE switch to Boot.ini file.
1. Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Control Panel].
2. In [Control Panel], double-click [System].
3. Click the [Advanced] tab, and then click [Settings] under [Setup and
Recovery].
4. Under [System Setup], click [Edit] to open [Boot.ini].
5. Add "/PAE" to [Operating Systems] section in [Boot.ini] file, and then save it.
<Example of Boot.ini file>
[boot loader]
timeout=30
default=multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS
[operating systems]
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003,
Standard" /fastdetect
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003,
Standard, PAE" /fastdetect /PAE
C:\CMDCONS\BOOTSECT.DAT="Microsoft Windows Recovery Console" /
cmdcons
This is the end of editing Boot.ini file.
Note: If you choose one of the items in the "Default
operating system" drop-down list box in [Setup and Recovery]
group box, you can make your system start automatically from
the switch you specified.
Setting for Solving Problems
Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from any
trouble precisely and as soon as possible when it should occur.
296
User Guide
www.bull.com
Memory Dump (Debug Information)
This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump (debug information)
in the server.
Caution
■ The staff of maintenance service representative is in charge
of collecting memory dump. Customers need only to specify
the memory dump.
■ If any trouble occur after specifying the process below, the
message to inform that the system is in short of virtual memory may appear, but continue to start the system. If you restart the system in such case, memory dump may not be
stored correctly.
Follow the procedure below to specify.:
1. Select [Control Panel] and click [System].
The [System Properties] dialog box is displayed.
2. Select [Advanced] tab.
3. Click [Settings] on the [Startup and Recovery] group box.
Caution
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
■ We recommend you specify "Complete Memory Dump" to
write the debug information.
If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB, "Complete
Memory Dump" cannot be specified so we recommend you
specify "Kernel Memory Dump" instead.
■ Specify the drive where there is a free area bigger than the
size of "the memory capacity mounted on Express server +
1MB".
■ If the memory size exceeds 2GB due to added memory,
change the write debugging information to [Kernel Memory
Dump] before adding the memory. The size of the specified
debugging information (memory dump) also changes when
adding memory. We recommend you check (and change, if
applicable) the size of the empty space in the debugging
information (memory dump) write destination drive.
Windows Server 2003 Editions
■ We recommend you specify "Complete Memory Dump" to
write the debug information.
If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB, "Complete
Memory Dump" cannot be specified so we recommend you
specify "Kernel Memory Dump" instead.
297
User Guide
www.bull.com
■ Specify the drive where there is a free area bigger than the
size of "the memory capacity mounted on Express server +
12MB". (In case the memory capacity is more than 2GB, a
free area of "2048+12MB" or more).
■ If the memory size exceeds 2GB due to added memory,
change the write debugging information to [Kernel Memory
Dump] before adding the memory. The size of the specified
debugging information (memory dump) also changes when
adding memory. We recommend you check (and change, if
applicable) the size of the empty space in the debugging
information (memory dump) write destination drive.
4. Specify "Complete memory dump" and modify [Dump file:] in the [Write
debugging information] group box.
e.g.Write the debug information in D drive in the file named MEMORY.DMP.
D:\MEMORY.DMP
5. Click [Settings] on the [Performance] group box.
The [Performance Options] window is displayed.
6. Click [Advanced] tab on the [Performance Options] window.
7. Click [Change] on the [Virtual memory] group box.
8. Modify [Initial Size] in the [Paging file size for selected drive] box to the value
larger than [Recommended], and click [Set].
Caution
■ The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for
collecting debug information (memory dump). A paging file
with an initial size large enough to store the dump file in the
boot drive is required.
It may be impossible to collect correct debugging information
due to a virtual memory shortage if the paging file is insufficient, so we recommend you set a paging file large enough
for the entire system.
■ For more information on "Recommended" value, see "Partition Size to be Created" described earlier.
■ In case the memory is expanded, re-specify the paging file
to suit the new memory size.
9. A message prompting to restart the system may appear according to the
modified specification. In such cases, restart the system.
Windows Dr. Watson
Windows Dr. Watson is a debugger for application errors. If any application error is
detected, Dr. Watson diagnoses the server and logs diagnostic information (log).
Follow the procedure below and specify Dr. Watson to collect diagnostic information.:
298
User Guide
www.bull.com
1. Click [Run] on Start menu.
2. Type "drwtsn32.exe" in the [Open] box, and click [OK].
The [Dr. Watson for Windows] dialog box appears.
3. Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the [Log File Path]
box.
The diagnostic information will be stored with the file name
"DRWTSN32.LOG".
Note: You cannot specify a network path. Specify a path on
a local computer.
4. Specify the location of crash dump file in the [Crash Dump] box.
Note: "Crash Dump File" is a binary file that can be read
with Windows Debugger.
5. Check the following check box on the [Option] box.
† Dump Symbol Table
† Dump All Thread Contexts
† Add To Existing Log File
† Create Crash Dump File
For more information on each function above, refer to Online Help.
6. Click [OK].
Network Monitor
Using Network Monitor helps you to investigate and manage with network trouble. To
use Network Monitor, you need to restart the system after the installation has
completed, so we recommend to install Network Monitor before any network trouble
may occur.
1. Point to [Settings] from Start menu and click [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] dialog box is displayed.
2. Double-click [Add or Remove Programs].
The [Add or Remove Programs] dialog box is displayed.
3. Click [Add or Remove Windows Component].
The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box is displayed.
299
User Guide
www.bull.com
4. Click [Management and Monitoring Tools] and click [Details].
The [Management and Monitoring Tools] dialog box appears.
5. Click to select the [Network Monitor Tools] check box, then click [OK].
6. The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box appears again. Click [Next].
7. If the setup asks to install the disk, insert the OS CD-ROM into the CD-ROM
drive and click [OK].
8. Click [Finish] in the [Windows Component Wizard] dialog box.
9. Close the [Add or Remove Programs] dialog box.
10. Close the [Control Panel] dialog box.
To start Network Monitor, point to [Program] → [Administrative Tools] and click
[Network Monitor].
For information on how to operate Network Monitor, refer to Online Help.
Installing Maintenance Utilities
Various maintenance utilities are contained in your ExpressBuilder CD-ROM. See
“Appendix 6: Installing and Using Utilities” on page 257.
Updating the System - Installing Service pack
Warning
If you install from the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM which
contains Service Pack 1, you do not need to install the Service
Pack 1 again.
Update the system in the situation below:
■ Modified system configuration.
■ Recovered the system using recovery process.
Log on to the system with the account that has administrative authority (e.g.
Administrator) and insert the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM into the optical device drive.
[Setup Software] in [Master Control Menu] screen is displayed, right-click the item.
Click [Update the System] from the menu and the setup will start. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Making Backup Copies of System Information
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific
information for the server.
Save the information after completing the system setup.
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.
You can save the information by the following process.
300
User Guide
www.bull.com
1. Set the ExpressBuilder CD-ROM in the optical device drive and reboot the
system.
2. Select [Tools].
3. Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].
4. Select [System Information Management].
5. Insert a diskette in the floppy disk drive.
6. Select [Save].
Installing with the OEM-FD for Mass Storage Device
This section explains how to setup with the OEM-FD. You usually do not have to do as
follows. If you want to install other boards by using a driver floppy disk, set the server
as follows. Detailed information is provided in the manual of the mass storage device.
Installation of mass storage device not supported by ExpressSetup
If you would like to install the OS when the system has new mass storage device not
supported by ExpressBuilder, you have to setup as follows.
1. Read the manual supplied with the mass storage device before setting the
server.
2. If the mass storage device is disk array controller, configure the RAID system
before running the ExpressBuilder.
3. Boot the system from ExpressBuilder CD-ROM.
4.
(a) When the message “Do you want to use the parameters file...”
appears , select “Yes”.
(b) When the dialog of Disk array configuration appears, check “Use
Existing Array”
(c) Check “Apply OEM-FD for Mass storage device”
5. Copy the driver for the mass storage device in the ExpressSetup.
6. Insert the FD attached the mass storage device into the FD drive.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to continue the ExpressSetup.
301
User Guide
www.bull.com
Appendix 8: Equipment Log
Use this equipment log form to record pertinent information about your system. You
will need some of this information to run the System Setup Utility. Be sure to update
the equipment log when you add options.
Record the model and serial numbers of the system components, dates of component
removal or replacement, and the name of the vendor from whom the component was
purchased. Be sure to record the same information for any components added to the
system, such as a power supply, hard disk drives, add-in boards, or printers.
Record the model and serial numbers of the unit and system board. The model and
serial numbers of the system unit are recorded on a label attached to the rear of the unit.
The location of serial numbers on add-in boards, hard disk drives, and external equipment, such as video displays or printers, varies from one manufacturer to another. Literature accompanying these products should illustrate or describe the location of model
and serial numbers.
302
User Guide
www.bull.com
Hardware
Main Unit
Model name
Serial No.
Date installed
Clock
Serial No.
Date installed
Clock
Serial No.
Date installed
#11, #12
Size
Serial No.
Date installed
#9, #10
Size
Serial No.
Date installed
#7, #8
Size
Serial No.
Date installed
#5, #6
Size
Serial No.
Date installed
#3, #4
Size
Serial No.
Date installed
#1, #2
Size
Serial No.
Date installed
Type
Model name
Serial No.
CPU
#1
Memory
Monitor
Date installed
Hard Disk
ID0
Type
Serial No.
Capacity
Date installed
Type number
ID1
Type
Serial No.
Capacity
Date installed
Type number
ID2
Type
Serial No.
Capacity
Date installed
Type number
ID3
Type
Serial No.
Capacity
Date installed
Type number
ID4
Type
Serial No.
Capacity
Date installed
Type number
ID5
Type
Serial No.
Capacity
Date installed
Type number
Backup Device
303
User Guide
www.bull.com
Size
Capacity
Serial No.
Model name
Type number
Date installed
PCI Slot #1B
Model name
Serial No.
Date installed
PCI Slot #2B
Model name
Serial No.
Date installed
PCI Slot #3B
Model name
Serial No.
Date installed
PCI Slot #1C
Model name
Serial No.
Date installed
PCI Slot #2C
Model name
Serial No.
Date installed
PCI Slot #3C
Model name
Serial No.
Date installed
Printer
Model name
Serial No.
Manufacturer
Date installed
Additional cabinet for disk
Model name
Serial No.
Date installed
External Peripheral Device 1
Model name
Serial No.
Manufacturer
Date installed
External Peripheral Device 2
Model name
Serial No.
Manufacturer
Date installed
External Peripheral Device 3
Model name
Serial No.
Manufacturer
Date installed
External Peripheral Device 4
304
User Guide
www.bull.com
Model name
Serial No.
Manufacturer
Date installed
305
User Guide
www.bull.com
Software
Firmware version
OS
Apply
Application of RUR media
File system
FAT
Name:
Version
Name:
Version
HPFS
Others (
NTFS
)
Bundled software installed
Licensed software installed
Application running when a failure
occurred
306
User Guide
www.bull.com
Appendix 9: Restrictions
This document describes the restrictions on the Bull NovaScale R460. Please read the
below notices carefully and make sure to follow them.
Table 32: Bull NovaScale R460 Restrictions
List of Restrictions
1
Remote Management Extended License
To use a remote media feature by applying a remote management extended license, you need to update
the firmware of EXPRESSSCOPE engine. You can download the relevant firmware from our web site.
You can use the remote console feature on the current firmware by applying the remote management
extended license.
2
Wake ON LAN Feature
Immediately after the AC power is turned on, the Remote Power ON/OFF feature (Wake ON LAN) is disabled. Start Windows 2003 once, provide settings as shown below, then shutdown the system. After
restart, the Remote Power On/Off feature is available unless the AC power is turned off.
Select [Start] → [Administrative Tools] → [Computer Management].
Select Device Manager, double-click [Intel(R) PRO/1000 EB Network Connection with I/O Acceleration #n] under Network Adapter, and specify as follows in [Detail] tab.
PME:
[ON]
Wake On:[Magic Packet]
3
Standby Feature
The standby feature of Windows Server is not available. Do not select "Standby" in the Windows
shutdown menu.
4
Memory Mirroring
In memory mirroring configuration, the menus related to memory mirroring in BIOS SETUP are grayed
out and unselectable in the following cases:
When you additionally install DIMMs that unable to configure memory mirroring
When you remove DIMMs that takes down the memory mirroring
In this case, execute [Load Setup Defaults] to cancel the memory mirroring configuration.
<Procedure>
(1)
Note the BIOS SETUP settings.
(2)
Press the <F2> key during POST to run BIOS SETUP utility.
(3)
Select [Exit] → [Load Setup Defaults].
(4)
When a message "Load default configuration now?" appears, select [Yes].
(5)
Enter the parameter values you have saved in step (1).
Note: Executing [Load Setup Defaults] restores the
default values for all Setup parameters. You need to
specify those parameters again.
307
User Guide
www.bull.com
Table 32: Bull NovaScale R460 Restrictions (Continued)
List of Restrictions
5
When Installing Operating System without Using Express Setup
To install the Windows operating system on the server, be sure to remove the external USB floppy disk
drive when the message prompting you to restart the system appears upon completion of text-mode
setup (Screen 1). Connect the external USB floppy disk drive after the OS has been installed.
Once the external floppy disk drive has been removed, keyboard entry may be disabled when you
attempt to reply to popup message during setup in GUI mode. In such a case, use a mouse instead
(Screens 2 and 3).
If the installation is conducted with an external floppy disk drive connected, the keyboard and mouse may
not work properly during setup in GUI mode.
[Screen 1]
[Screen 2]
[Screen 3]
308
User Guide
www.bull.com
Note: If you have any questions about this document,
please contact your sales representative.
309
This page is deliberately left empty.
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„